Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
eBook

Intended for Autodesk Inventor 2020 and 2021 but useable with earlier releases.
ISBN 0-9734485-8-9
 Inventor® Self-paced eBook
Autodesk Inventor 2021
Copyright © 2020 Vancouver Community College Revision No. 2020-1

Autodesk Inventor ebook by Wally Baumback is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution
4.0 International License.

Editor: Bruce McGarvie, Vancouver Community College

Note: Images of AutoCAD software are not included under this license.

Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries:
AutoCAD®, AutoCAD LT®, Autodesk®, Autodesk Inventor®, AutoLISP®, AutoSketch®,
AutoSnap™, AutoTrack™, DesignCenter™, DesignStudio®, DWF™, DWG™, DWGX™,
DXF™, Inventor®, Inventor LT™, Mechanical Desktop®, ObjectARX®, ObjectDBX™,
RasterDWG®, RealDWG®, Revit®, Revit LT™, SketchBook®, SteeringWheels®,
TrustedDWG™, ViewCube®, Visual®, Visual LISP®
Revision Date

28 June 2020 (8:59pm)

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module Content
Content and Learning Outcomes

Cover

Content and Learning Outcomes

Module Introduction 1 Inventor eBook Introduction

1 List the software and template files required to complete the Autodesk Inventor eBook.
2 Describe the Autodesk Inventor Self-paced eBook philosophy and explain how to use the
eBook to learn how to apply the Inventor commands and features to create Inventor parts,
assemblies, and drawings.

Module Introduction 2 Configuring Your Inventor Software

3 Configure your Inventor software for the Inventor eBook.

Module 1 Projects
4 Describe an Inventor project.
5 Create the Inventor project that you will be using to organize and manage the files that you
create while completing the Inventor eBook.

Module 2 Inventor’s User Interface

6 Describe template files, part files, sketches, and 3D solid models.
7 Describe and configure Inventor’s user interface, its menus, and use of the mouse.
8 Apply the NEW, SAVE, and CLOSE commands to create a new part file using a template
plus name, save, and close a file.

Module 3 Viewing the 2D Sketch and 3D Model

9 Describe how to change the viewing position of the 2D sketch and the 3D model by zooming,
panning, and orbiting.
10 Apply the OPEN command to open existing Inventor files.
11 Apply the ZOOM, ORBIT, ZOOM ALL, PAN, and HOME VIEW commands or use the wheel
on the mouse to change the viewing position of the 2D sketch and 3D model.

Contents and Learning Outcomes ©2004 - 2020 Module Contents

Contents - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Module 4 Sketching Lines

12 Describe the Cartesian Coordinate System, parametric solid modeling, the Base sketch, and
geometrical constraints.
13 Describe snapping onto grids, lines, endpoints, and midpoints.
14 Describe and apply the PROJECT GEOMETRY command to project the Center Point onto
the Base sketch.
15 Following Inventors 2D sketching rules, describe and apply the LINE command to draw the
Base sketch of simple solid models.

Module 5 Extruding - Part 1

16 Describe dimensional constraints, linear dimensions, driving and driven dimensions.
17 Apply the GENERAL DIMENSION command to insert the necessary linear dimensions to fully
constrain Base sketches.
18 Describe and apply the EXTRUDE command to extrude Base sketches to create the 3D Base
model.

Module 6 Competency Test No. 1

19 Within a one hour time limit, complete a written exam and a lab exercise.

Module 7 Extruding - Part 2

20 Describe how to construct a solid model using multiple sketches, linear dimensions, plus
joining and cutting extrusions.
21 Describe and apply the 2DSKETCH command to create 2D sketches on a solid model.
Extrude the sketches to either join them to or cut them from the solid model.

Module 8 Multiview Drawings

22 Describe multiview drawings, the glass box principle, the three standard views, object lines,
and hidden lines.
23 From a 3D pictorial of an object, draw a multiview drawing using the three standard views.

Module 9 Visualizing 3D Models

24 Using multiview drawings, visualize and sketch isometric drawings of 3D models on isometric
grid paper.

Module 10 2D Sketching Planes

25 Describe the three predefined 2D sketching planes and the view of the model that they are on.
26 Construct solid models by drawing the Base sketch on either the Front or Right Side instead of
the default Top view.
27 Describe a consumed and an unconsumed sketch.

Module 11 Competency Test No. 2

28 Within a one hour time limit, complete a written exam and a lab exercise.

Contents and Learning Outcomes ©2004 - 2020 Module Contents

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 Contents - 3

Module 12 Circles
29 Describe construction objects and their use in a 2D sketch.
30 Describe drawing circles and offsets in a 2D sketch.
31 Apply the CENTER POINT CIRCLE and OFFSET commands to complete 2D sketches.

Module 13 Arcs
32 Describe the geometry of an arc and how arcs are drawn in Inventor.
33 Describe how to snap to midpoints of lines.
34 Apply the CENTER POINT ARC command to draw arcs in 2D sketches.

Module 14 Revolving
35 Describe a centerline object and explain how it is inserted and used in a 2D Sketch.
36 Describe how a Base sketch is revolved with and without the use of a centerline to create a
solid model.
37 Apply the REVOLVE command to create a solid model from a Base sketch.

Module 15 Fillet and Chamfer Features

38 Describe fillet and chamfer features.
39 Apply the FILLET and CHAMFER commands to create fillets and chamfers on solid models.

Module 16 Competency Test No. 3

40 Within a two hour time limit, complete a written exam and a lab exercises.

Module 17 Angles
41 Describe drawing inclined lines, aligned and angular dimensions, loops, trimming, and
extending.
42 Apply the GENERAL DIMENSIONS command to insert aligned and angular dimensions on a
sketch.
43 Apply the TRIM and EXTEND commands to trim and extend objects in a sketch.

Module 18 Editing Geometry

44 Describe how to select objects using windows and crossing windows.
45 Describe and apply the THREE POINT ARC, TWO POINT RECTANGLE, and COPY
commands.

Module 19 Work Features

46 Describe and apply the POLYGON, TANGENT CIRCLE, and THREAD commands.
47 Describe work features including Work Points, Work Axes, and Work Planes and explain how
they are used in model construction.
48 Describe and apply the WORK POINT, WORK AXIS, and WORK PLANE commands.

Contents and Learning Outcomes ©2004 - 2020 Module Contents

Contents - 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Module 20 Modifying Solid Models

49 Describe how to edit the dimensions and part features of an existing solid model using the
Browser bar to aid you.
50 Describe how to hide and/or suppress features in the solid model.
51 Describe and apply the MEASURE command to measure lengths, loops, angles, or areas of
a solid model in either two dimensions or three dimensions.
52 Describe how to set the material and change the color of faces of the solid model.
53 Describe how to obtain the physical properties of a solid model.

Module 21 Competency Test No. 4

54 Within a two hour time limit, complete a written exam and the lab exercise.

Module 22 Assemblies
55 Describe an assembly and explain the difference between a top-down and a bottom-up
assembly.
56 Describe and apply the SLICE GRAPHICS command.
57 Describe the PLACE COMPONENT and PLACE CONSTRAINT commands and apply them
to assemble a series of parts to create an assembled model.

Module 23 Presentation Files

58 Describe a presentation file, an exploded assembly, and an animation.
59 Describe and apply the CREATE VIEW, PRECISE VIEW ROTATION, TWEAK
COMPONENT, and ANIMATE commands to create, tweak, and play the animation of an
exploded assembly.

Module 24 2D Drawings - Part 1

60 Describe 2D drawing files, drawing sheets, and drawing sizes.
61 Describe and apply the commands BASE VIEW, PROJECTED VIEW, SECTION VIEW, and
NEW SHEET to create multiview and isometric views of a solid model on a drawing sheet.

Module 25 2D Drawings - Part 2

62 Describe basic dimensioning, centerlines, and standard styles.
63 Describe and apply the STYLES EDITOR command to copy and edit standard styles to
create your own dimension and text styles.
64 Describe and apply the RETRIEVE DIMENSION, CENTERLINES, and GENERAL
DIMENSION commands to place model and drawing dimensions and centerlines on drawing
views.
65 Describe how styles are exported out of and imported into drawing files.

Module 26 Competency Test No.5

66 Within a six hour time limit, complete a written exam and the lab exercise.

Index

Contents and Learning Outcomes ©2004 - 2020 Module Contents

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module Introduction 1
Inventor eBook Introduction

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:

1 List the software and template files required to complete the Autodesk Inventor eBook.
2 Describe the Autodesk Inventor Self-paced eBook philosophy and explain how to use the
eBook to learn how to apply the Inventor commands and features to create Inventor parts,
assemblies, and drawings.

Autodesk Inventor Software Required

The Autodesk Inventor eBook was written to be used with Autodesk Inventor Version 2020 and
2021. You must have access to one of these software packages to complete the lab exercises in
this eBook. It can also be used with Inventor 2015 through to 2019, but the interface structure was
different and will take a little more poking around to find things.
Philosophy of the Inventor Self-paced eBook
This eBook contains self-paced learning modules that were written as a tool to guide and teach
you to master Inventor. No two students learn at the same pace, therefore, the modules were
written as competency-based bite-size pieces to allow you to work at your own pace. They can
be used in correspondence courses, online courses, instructor-lead classes or by individuals
teaching themselves to use Inventor in their own home or office.
Scope of the Inventor eBooks
The Inventor eBooks were written in two parts, Autodesk Inventor and Autodesk Inventor
Advanced.
Suggested Prerequisites
To get the most from this eBook, it is suggested that you have a working knowledge of the
Windows operating system that is installed on the computer you are using to learn Inventor. You
must be able to send and receive e-mails, complete with attachments. You must also be able to
create folders, save files, move files, copy files, rename files, and delete files.
Using the Inventor eBook
The Autodesk Inventor eBook modules were written in a very logical step-by-step order. To get the
most from this eBook:
Ž Do not skim through them.
Ž You must read and understand everything in each module.
Ž Do not jump around inside the module or from module to module.
Ž Work your way methodically through each module, page by page.

Inventor eBook Introduction ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 1

Intro 1 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

The Modules
The modules were written in a precise order and contain the information you require to learn
Inventor. Using Inventor is a never ending learning process and you will continue learning long
after you complete these modules.
As you work your way through each module, learn and try to understand all of the material. To
ensure that you understand it, complete the lab exercise(s) to prove it. Only when you
understand everything in the module and can complete the lab exercise(s) in the specified time
limit, should you go to the next module.
Each module may contain Must Know's, User Tips, Workalongs, Drafting Lessons, Geometry
Lessons, and Lab Exercises.
Must Knows
A Must Know is a an important Inventor principle or fact. You must understand and retain each
one of these principles as you work your way through the modules. If you cannot understand any
one of them, get some help or read back through the module. Do not go on until you fully
understand it. See the example below:
(Do not attempt to understand this Must Know now, it is here for an example only.)

The ESC key or the right-click menu can be used

to end the current command. You must let
Inventor know when you want to terminate the
command.

User Tips
User Tips are used in the modules to help you complete models faster and more efficiently. They
contain tips, tricks, and ways to use commands that will help you draw faster and increase your
productivity. Study them and try to use the tips while doing your labs exercises. Do not memorize
them as you will not be tested on them. You can re-read them anytime you wish. They are there to
help you work smarter, not harder. For example:
(Do not attempt to understand this User Tip now, it is here for an example only.)

When an Inventor pull-down has a small triangle at the end, there is a flyout
menu associated with it. A check mark means that the item is enabled. When
there is no check mark, it is disabled.

Inventor eBook Introduction ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 1

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 Intro 1 - 3

Workalongs
Workalongs are there to help you to understand how to use a command or a series of commands
to complete models and drawings using Autodesk Inventor. Complete all the steps in each
workalong to complete the model or assembly to practice using the command(s) taught in that
module. Try to understand how each command works and use those principles to complete the lab
exercise on your own.
(Do not attempt to understand this Workalong now, it is here for an example only.)

Drawing Sketches with Circles

Step 1 Check the default project and if necessary, set it to Inventor Course.

Step 2 Enter the NEW command to start a new part file

using the template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt.
Step 3 Save the file with the name:
Inventor Workalong 12-1.

3D Solid Model

Step 4 Draw the base sketch on the top

view. Since this is the XY plane (default
plane), use Sketch1.

Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Inventor eBook Introduction ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 1

Intro 1 - 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Geometry and Drafting Lessons

Some modules contain Drafting Lessons and/or Geometry Lessons. They are there to teach you
students who do not have any previous drafting/design knowledge or experience. They may also
be handy for drafters or designers who need a refresher lesson.
If you already know the theory in the lesson, skip it and go on to the next item in the module. If
you don't know it, study it. This theory is not part of the course and you will not be tested on it.
You should ensure you read them before you attempt to complete the lab exercises. For
example:
(Do not attempt to understand this Geometry Lesson now, it is here for an example only.)

Geometry Lesson
Circles
A circle is defined as a closed curve in which all points on the circle are the same distance from
its center point. The center point is a single XY coordinate. Study Figure 12-1 for a detailed
description of the geometry of a circle.

Figure 12-1
Geometry of a Circle

Inventor eBook Introduction ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 1

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 Intro 1 - 5

Key Principles
Each module contains a list of key principles. The key principles are principles that you should
have learned and understand in that module. It is important that you understand each one of
these principles as you will be required to use them in future Inventor work. For example:
(Do not attempt to learn the Key Principles now, it is here for an example only.)

The Key Principles in Module 4

1 The @ symbol means "The last absolute coordinate location".
2 To close the last line of a series of lines, use either C (Close) or the absolute coordinate of
the first point.
3 To delete existing objects on a drawing, you can either use the ERASE command or the
Delete key on the keyboard.
4 Objects can either be selected before or after the command is entered.

Lab Exercises
All lab exercises have a time limit allocated to them. To complete the lab exercise in the specified
time limit, you must be able to complete the model or assembly and make any corrections. If you
cannot do this in the time allowed, redo the entire lab exercise. It is your way of proving that you
have mastered the module.
Almost all modules contain at least two lab exercises. It is strongly suggested that you complete all
lab exercises, in all modules.
Competency Tests
Every fifth module is a timed competency test module. A competency test module has multiple
choice questions and a comprehensive lab exercise to test your mastery of the last four modules
that you just completed. If there are any parts of this module that you have trouble completing or
you cannot complete in the time allowed, you should go back and reread the module or modules
containing the information that you are having trouble with. If necessary, redo any lab exercises to
help you learn the material.

Inventor eBook Introduction ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 1

Intro 1 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Conventions and Symbols Used in the Autodesk Inventor Modules

The following conventions and symbols are used in the modules to help you understand the
material.
Words in Red Italics
Words in red italics are new terms being introduced in that module. They will only appear in
italics the first time they are mentioned and will be defined. For example:
Construction objects are objects that are drawn in the sketch to assist the operator in completing
the sketch but will be ignored by Inventor when the sketch is extruded or revolved.
Command Names
Command names are always in uppercase. For example:
To construct a fillet, use the FILLET command. The rule of thumb to follow is "If the arc you are
drawing is tangent to both objects it is connecting to, use the FILLET command to insert it”.
Author's Comments
There are author comment's throughout the modules. For example:
Author's Comments: Note the location of X0Y0Z0 icon. The icon's vertex is located at X0Y0Z0. The
red arrow points in the positive X direction, the green arrow points in the positive Y direction and
the blue arrow points in the positive Z direction.

The Key Principles in Module Introduction 1

1 To complete the lab exercises in this eBook, you must have the template files that accompany
it, on your hard disk drive.
2 Do not skim through the modules. You must read and understand everything in each module.
Do not jump around inside the module or from module to module. Work your way methodically
through each module, page by page.
3 The Inventor Self-paced eBook's modules were written as competency-based bite-size pieces to
allow you to work at your own pace and learn to use Inventor. Do not go onto the next module until
you understand the module you are working on and have completed the lab exercise(s).
4 All lab exercises have a time limit allocated to them. To complete the lab exercise in the
specified time limit, you must be able to complete the model or assembly and make any
corrections. If you cannot do this in the time allowed, redo the entire lab exercise. It is your way of
proving that you have mastered the module.

Do not memorized Inventor - UNDERSTAND it.

Have fun on your journey into the fascinating, never-ending world

of learning and mastering Inventor.

Inventor eBook Introduction ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 1

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module Introduction 2
Configuring Your Inventor Software

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Configure your Inventor software for the Inventor eBook.

Configuring Your Inventor Software ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 2

Intro 2 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Configuring your Inventor Software for the Inventor eBook

Complete all of the following steps:

Step 1 Start Inventor. Your screen should appear similar to the figure. Your colors may
not be the same, but the basic configuration should be. If any additional dialogue boxes
or windows open, close them. (Figure Step 1)

Figure Step 1

Author's Comments: Inventor 2020 and 2021: Your screen might differ slightly from the one
shown in the figure; colors in particular. Inventor 2019 and earlier: The basic header area will be
quite similar, but the main screen area will be empty. Similarly, there may be slight differences in
the colors and appearance of interface elements throughout this book.

Configuring Your Inventor Software ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 2

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 Intro 2 - 3

Step 2 Click the arrow icon at the end of the Ribbon menu (beside the Help ? icon). Set the pull-
down menu by enabling or disabling features to match the figure. (Figure Step 2)

Figure Step 2

Step 3 Click the small down-arrow icon on the right side of the Pull-down menu. Enable Cycle
through All. (Figure Step 3) The arrow with the box around it will now cycle you through three
variants of interface display configurations.

Figure Step 3

Configuring Your Inventor Software ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 2

Intro 2 - 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 4 Click the arrow icon at the end of the quick-access toolbar (by the little house icon).
Make sure the enabled and disabled features match the figure. (Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 4

Step 5 Click Tools on the menu at the top of the window. Click the Application Options icon as
shown in Figure Step 5. This will open the Application Options dialogue box (Figure Step 6).

Figure Step 5

Configuring Your Inventor Software ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 2

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 Intro 2 - 5

Step 6 Click on the General tab. Compare the settings of your inventor with the figure. If the
settings do not match, change yours to match. (Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6

Configuring Your Inventor Software ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 2

Intro 2 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 7 Enable the Sketch tab. Compare the settings of your inventor with the figure. If the
settings do not match, change yours to match. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Configuring Your Inventor Software ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 2

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 Intro 2 - 7

Step 8 Enable the Part tab. Compare the settings of your inventor with the figure. If the settings do
not match, change yours to match. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Configuring Your Inventor Software ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 2

Intro 2 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 9 Enable the Display tab. Compare the settings of your inventor with the figure. If the
settings do not match, change yours to match. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Configuring Your Inventor Software ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 2

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 Intro 2 - 9

Step 10 In the Display tab, click the ViewCube box to open the ViewCube Options dialogue box.
Compare the settings of your inventor with the figure. If the settings do not match, change yours to
match. (Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Configuring Your Inventor Software ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 2

Intro 2 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 11 Enable the Colors tab. Check that the settings of your Inventor match the figure.

Figure Step 11

Configuring Your Inventor Software ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 2

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 Intro 2 - 11

Step 12 Click Close button to close the Application Options dialogue box.
Step 13 Click Tools and then the Customize icon. Click the Marking Menu tab and compare the
settings to your copy of Inventor.

Figure Step 13

Configuring Your Inventor Software ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 2

Intro 2 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 14 Click the Inventor icon located in the top left corner and then Close to exit Inventor,
OR click the File tab and then exit Inventor by clicking the Exit Autodesk Inventor Professional
button in the bottom right corner. (Figure Step 14)

Figure Step 14

Author's Comments: The settings that you made in this module are used in the Autodesk
Inventor eBook and are the defaults for the most part. Having completed this module you should
have some idea as to how much Inventor can be customized. After you complete the eBook, you
can configure your Inventor software to suit your personal needs.
Step 15 Go to Module 1.

Configuring Your Inventor Software ©2004 - 2020 Module Introduction 2

 Inventor ® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 1
Projects

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Describe an Inventor project.
2 Create the Inventor project that you will be using to organize and manage the files that you
create while completing the Inventor eBook.

An Inventor Project
An Inventor project is a user named process to logically organize, store, and manage the valid
links to the files created for an undertaking. For each project a user created name and a home
folder is assigned. Inventor creates a project file that contains the project's parameters and the
paths to the locations of the files in that project. There is no limit to the number of projects that
can be created. Inventor assigns a shortcut for each project so that you can easily select the
appropriate project when required.
A project should be created so that it has a logical connection between the files in it. For
example, if you were designing and drawing an office chair, all the individual parts of that chair,
the assembly drawings, the design data, and the 2D working drawings would be stored in a
project that you might name ' Office Chair '.
When a project is created, Inventor automatically
creates a project file and saves it in the home folder of
the project. A project file is automatically given the
extension .ipj and contains the project parameters data
as shown in Figure 1-1. This file also specifies the
paths to the templates and files in the project. The
information, parameters and data contained in the
project file can be edited as required.

Figure 1-1
Typical Project Parameter Data List

When a project is created, Inventor automatically creates a project file and saves it
in the home folder of the project. A project file is automatically given the extension
.ipj and contains the data list of the project's parameters. The extension .ipj is an
acronym for Inventor ProJect.

Projects ©2004 - 2020 Module 1

1-2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Inventor Command: PROJECTS

The PROJECTS command is used to create or manage Inventor projects.
Shortcut: None

Creating the Project for the Inventor eBook

Step 1 Start Inventor and enable the Get Started tab. In the ribbon menu, click
Projects. This will display the Projects window. (Figure Step 1)

Figure Step 1

Author's Comments: Do not be concerned if your version of Inventor does not match the figure
exactly.

Projects ©2004 - 2020 Module 1

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 1-3

Step 2 Click the New button along the bottom of the dialogue box. The Inventor project wizard
window will open. Enable the New Single User Project button and then click Next. (Figure Step
2A and 2B)

Figure Step 2A

Figure Step 2B

Author's Comments: Do not be concerned if your version of Inventor does not match the figures
exactly.

Projects ©2004 - 2020 Module 1

1-4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 3 Name the project: Inventor Course. (Figure Step 3)

Figure Step 3

Step 4 Set the location for the Project (Workspace) Folder. To do that, click the Browse button
(the one with the 3 dots at the right-hand of the Project (Workspace) Folder) window. In the
Browse for Folder dialogue box, locate the folder: C:\CAD Courses\Inventor\Lab Exercises.
Highlight it by selecting it and click OK.
(Figure Step 4A and 4B)

Figure
Step 4A

Figure Step 4B

Author's Comments: These are the folders that you created when you download the eBook and
templates for the Inventor course. When the Inventor Course project is set as the current project,
Inventor will automatically save the files that you create into the folder Lab Exercises - Inventor
Course project.

Projects ©2004 - 2020 Module 1

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 1-5

Step 5 You should now see the Project (Workspace) Folder location as follows:
C:\CAD Courses\Inventor\Lab Exercises (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Author's Comments: C:\CAD Courses\Inventor\Lab Exercises is the Home Folder for the
Inventor Course project.
Step 6 The Project File to be created will automatically be created by Inventor. (Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6

Author's Comments: Note how the box is grayed out. That means it cannot be edited and is
there for information only.
Step 7 Check the completed page and ensure it matches the figure. Click the Finish button to
complete the project setup. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Projects ©2004 - 2020 Module 1

1-6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 8 The Project window will show the new project that you just created. Double click Inventor
Course in the Projects name column and note how the check mark icon beside the Inventor Course
project indicates it is the current project. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Author's Comments: Ensure that the Inventor Course project is always the current project
when you are working on all exercises in the Inventor eBook.

Projects ©2004 - 2020 Module 1

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 1-7

Step 9 Down near the bottom, expand Folder Options and click the Templates folder to select it.
(Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Step 10 While the Templates folder is selected, right-click the mouse. In the right-click menu,
click Edit. (Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Step 11 Click the Browse icon. (Figure Step 11)

Figure Step 11

Author's Comments: The Browse icon is the small magnifying glass folder icon at the end of the
box.

Projects ©2004 - 2020 Module 1

1-8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 12 In the Browse For Folder dialogue box, locate and select the Templates folder:
C:\CAD Courses\Inventor\Templates

(Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 12

The folder location for the templates in the Inventor eBook should be set to
C:\CAD Courses\Inventor\Templates\ in the Inventor Course project.

Projects ©2004 - 2020 Module 1

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 1-9

Step 13 Click OK and the dialogue box will appear similar to the figure.
(Figure Step 13)

Figure Step 13

Author's Comments: This is the folder location where Inventor will look for template files when
you enter the NEW command.

Projects ©2004 - 2020 Module 1

1 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 14 Click Apply and Done to complete the new project.

Step 15 Exit Inventor.
Step 16 Open Windows Explorer and locate the folder Lab Exercises in the folder list. The file Inventor
Course.ipj, that was automatically created by Inventor in this workalong, should appear in the file list.
(Figure Step 16)

Figure Step 16

In the Projects window dialogue box, Inventor Course should always be the
current project when you are working on all exercises in the Inventor eBook.

The Key Principles in Module 1

1 An Inventor project is designed to logically organize, store, and manage the valid links to the
files created for each undertaking. For each project, a name and a home folder must be
assigned.
2 A project file is automatically given the extension .ipj and contains the project's specifications.
3 A check mark beside the Inventor Course project means it is the current project. Ensure that
this project is always the current project when working on all exercises in the Inventor eBook.

Projects ©2004 - 2020 Module 1

 Inventor ® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 2
Inventor’s User Interface

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:

1 Describe template files, part files, sketches, and 3D solid models.

2 Describe and configure Inventor’s user interface, its menus, and use of the mouse.
3 Apply the NEW, SAVE, and CLOSE commands to create a new part file using a template plus
name, save, and close a file.

Inventor’s Graphic Window

When a file is active, Inventor will display the Graphic window. The Graphic window has two
different modes, the Sketch mode and the Model mode. The Sketch mode is used to create and
edit 2D sketches that are then extruded or revolved to create 3D solid models. The Model mode is
used to view, manipulate and modify 3D solid models. You can switch between these two modes
to construct or edit and create the solid model. The mode that is currently displayed is called the
current mode. The Model mode must be the current mode to save the file.
A 3D Solid Model
A 3D solid model, Figure 2-1, is the best possible computerized representation of a real object. A
solid model can be colored or rendered plus the mass properties can be obtained from it. Mass
properties are attributes such as volume, weight, surface area, moments of inertia, and center of
gravity. They are taught in Module 20.

Figure 2-1
A 3D Solid Model

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

2-2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

An Inventor File
Regardless of the type of files that are created using Inventor, they are called files as compared to
files created on a CAD system which are typically called drawings. A file can be a 3D solid model
(called a part), an assembly, a presentation, or a drawing created in Inventor and saved in digital
format. The four types of files, taught in this eBook, that Inventor can create and save are part files,
assembly files, presentation files, and drawing files.
A Part File
A part file is one 3D solid model. A part file has the file extension .ipt which is an acronym for
Inventor ParT. A part file can be used on its own, used to create a working drawing, used as part of
an assembly file, or used as part of a presentation file. Assembly and presentation files are taught
in Module 21 to Module 26.
Starting a New File
A new file is started using the NEW command. The NEW command forces you to select the
template file that will be used to create the new file. Every new Inventor file must be created from
an existing template file. The file currently being editing in Inventor is called the current file or
sometimes the active file.
Templates
A template file is simply an Inventor file, set with the desired parameters by its creator, named,
and saved. As part of the Inventor eBook there are two distinct sets of templates provided. One set
is in english units and the other set is in metric units. The English templates use the base unit of
inches and the metric templates use the base unit of millimeters. Template files can also contain
modelling objects so that several similar parts can easily be started from a common pre-built unit.
Saving Files
Inventor keeps the current file in RAM memory. If the computer cashes or the power fails while the
operator is working on a file, all the work on the file, since the last time it was saved, will be lost.
When the file is saved it saves the current file that is in RAM memory onto the disk drive.
Ensure that the current file is saved frequently to avoid losing production time. You should get into
the habit of saving the current file every 5 to 10 minutes.

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 2-3

Inventor Command: NEW

The NEW command is used to start a new file.

Inventor Command: SAVE

The SAVE command is used to save the current file from RAM memory onto the disk drive.
Shortcut: CTRL-S

Inventor Command: CLOSE

The CLOSE command is used to close the current file.
Shortcut: None

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

2-4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Inventor’s Menus
Inventor has many different menus that are used by you to give instructions to Inventor while
constructing and editing files. The Inventor menus taught in the Inventor eBook are the Pull-down
menu, the Ribbon menu, the Quick Access toolbar, the Browser bar, and the Right-click menu.
Inventor's Pull-Down Menu
To pull down Inventor's Pull-down menu, click the File tab. If the pull down menu item has a small
solid triangle at the end, it has a flyout menu associated with it. If you move the cursor on the
triangle, the flyout menu will display. See Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2
The Pull-Down Menu

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 2-5

Ribbon Menu
The Ribbon menu is used for most of your work in Inventor. See Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3
A Typical Ribbon Menu

Browser Bar
The Browser bar displays the hierarchical structure of the
model or assembly of the current file. It is your most important
and most-used tool to create and modify objects within files.
The Browser bar will be taught in more detail in future
modules. It is normally docked on the left side of the Graphic
window. See Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4
Browser Bar

Figure 2-5
Right-click Menu
Right-Click Menu
When the right mouse button is clicked, it displays the Right-click menu.
See Figure 2-5. It is sometimes called the Cursor menu since it displays
at the current location of the cursor. This menu changes automatically
depending on the current command or operation being performed. It
usually takes the new user a bit of time to get used to using this menu.

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

2-6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Status Bar
The Status bar is permanently located along the bottom of the Graphic window. It displays the
prompts that the current command is issuing, as shown in Figure 2-6, as well as the coordinate
locations, as shown in Figure 2-7. These prompts help you understand what information Inventor
requires and the cursor location, length, and angle in the current command.

Figure 2-6
Status Bar - Showing a Command
Prompt.

Figure 2-7
Status Bar - Showing Coordinate
Information

The Graphic Cursor

The Graphic cursor is used to select menu items or objects on the sketch or model.
See Figure 2-8.

Figure 2-8
The Graphic
Cursor

Dialogue Boxes
Inventor commands use many different dialogue
boxes to obtain information to be used by the
command or current operation. A typical dialogue
box is shown in Figure 2-9.

Figure 2-9
A Typical Dialogue Box

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 2-7

The Mouse
Inventor is programed to use the three buttons on the mouse as follows:
Left Button: This is the pick button. Use it to pick objects, pick menu items, or select
locations on the sketch or model.
Middle Button: The middle button or the wheel is used to zoom and pan around the Graphic
window. This will be discussed in detail in Module 3.
Right Button: The right button displays the Right-click menu. See Figure 2-10. The Right-click
menu will change depending on the current command or operation being
preformed. It is a very helpful menu and should be used as often as possible
when working in Inventor.
Inventor Commands
An Inventor command is an instruction from you to Inventor instructing it what operation to
perform. Commands can be entered by selecting an item from a Pull-down menu, a Right-click
menu, an icon on a Toolbar, an item on the Panel menu, or entering a shortcut on the keyboard.
Since there are usually many different ways of entering the same command, you should select
the method that works the best for you. There is no right or wrong way to enter a command. You
should experiment to find the fastest method to improve your drawing speed and productivity.

Ending the Current Command

When you enter a command, it becomes the current command or
sometimes called the active command. Inventor must be instructed to end
the current command. There are two methods available to do this. The first
is to press the Esc key on the keyboard and the second is click to Done or
Cancel on the Right-click menu as shown in Figure 2-10.
Undo and Redo Commands
In the current file, any Inventor command or commands can be undone to
reverse any changes that they may have made. To do this, click the Undo
icon in the Quick Access toolbar as shown in Figure 2-11. Each click will
undo the previous step. If the Undo icon was used to undo a command or a
Figure 2-10 series of commands, it can be reversed by clicking the Redo icon. See
Ending a Figure 2-12.
Command

Figure Figure
2-11 2-12
Undo Redo
Icon Icon

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

2-8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Creating and Saving a Part File

Step 1 Start Inventor and check the current project. If required, set it to Inventor
Course. (Figure Step 1)

Figure Step 1

Step 2 Click the NEW command icon in the upper left corner of the
screen or under the File tab. In the Create New File dialogue box, enable
the folder: Templates - English. (Figure Step 2A and 2B)

Figure Step 2A

Figure Step 2B

Author's Comments: If the Create New File dialogue box does not display template files where
all the names begin with Modules (i.e. Modules Part (in).ipt), stop this workalong and go back and
redo Module 1.

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 2-9

Step 3 Select the template: Modules Part (in).ipt icon

and click OK. (Figure Step 3)

Figure Step 3

Step 4 Inventor will display the Graphic window, in Sketch mode, as shown in the figure. (Figure
Step 4)

Figure Step 4

Step 5 Click the Finish Sketch icon to change to Model mode.

(Figure Step 5A and 5B)

Figure Step 5A

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

2 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 5B

Step 6 Click the Save icon. It will open the Save As dialogue box. In the File name: box, enter
the name: Inventor Workalong 02-1 and click Save. (Figure Step 6A and 6B)

.
Figure Step 6A

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 2-11

Figure Step 6B

Author's Comments: Ensure that the Save in: box displays the folder Lab Exercises. If it does
not, check to ensure that the current project is set to Inventor Course
Step 7 The file name should now display on top bar of the Graphic window similar to what is
shown in the figure. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Step 8 Click the File tab and then the Close icon to close the current part file. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

2 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 9 Click the Inventor icon to pull down the menu. On the Pull-down menu, click Exit
Autodesk Inventor Professional to exit Inventor. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 2-13

Configuring and Working with Inventor's Interface

Step 1 Start Inventor and check the current project. If required, set it to Inventor
Course.
Step 2 Click the New icon. In the New File dialogue box, enable the folder: Metric Templates.
Step 3 Select the template: Module Part (mm).ipt. (Figure Step 3)
Author's Comments: The units for this part are millimeters.

Figure Step 3

Step 4 Click Finish Sketch to exit Sketch mode. While in Model mode, save the part file with the
name: Inventor Workalong 02-2. (Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 4

Author's Comments: You must be in Model mode to save the current part file.

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

2 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 5 Move the cursor onto the space between the plus (+) sign and the magnifying glass at the
top of the Browser bar and press and hold the left mouse button down. While holding the button
down, drag the Browser bar into the Graphic window. The Graphic window should appear similar
to the figure. (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Author's Comments: I had you do Step 5 to show you how to undock and move the Browser bar
onto the Graphic window. When you do this, it is called a floating menu. When it is attached to one
of the four sides, it is called a docked menu.

The Status bar displays Inventor prompts to the you. Watch it closely as it will
display what information the current command is looking for from you or
coordinate information of the current cursor location.

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 2-15

Step 6 Move the cursor onto the space between the plus (+) sign and the magnifying glass at the
top of the Browser bar and press and hold the left mouse button down. While holding the button
down, drag the Browser bar to the left until its colors fade. Release the left mouse button and the
browser bar will dock on the left edge of the screen. (Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6
Author's Comments: You may have to practice docking and undocking the menu and moving
them around the Graphic window until you get comfortable doing it. The Graphic window
configuration shown in Figure Step 6 is the one I use when working in Inventor. I suggest that
you use it while working on the workalongs and lab exercises in the Inventor eBook.

Either the Esc key on the keyboard or the Cancel on the

Right-click menu must be used to end the current command.
You must always let Inventor know when to terminate the
current command.

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

2 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 7 Click Sketch1 in the Browser bar to select it and right

click the mouse. In the Right-click menu, click Edit Sketch.
(Figure Step 7)

Step 8 The Graphic window will change to Sketch mode and Figure Step 7
should appear similar to the figure. (Figure step 8)

Figure Step 8

Step 9 Change to Model mode. Save and close the part file.

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 2-17

The Browser bar displays the hierarchical structure of the model or assembly of
the current file. It is your most important and most-used tool to create and modify
files.

A part file is one 3D solid model. A part file has the file extension .ipt. The
extension .ipt is an acronym for Inventor ParT. Working drawings can be created
from the part file or part of an assembly or presentation file.

The Key Principles in Module 2

1 When a file is active, Inventor will display the Graphic window. The Graphic window has two
different modes, the Sketch mode and the Model mode. They are used to create 3D solid models,
called parts.
2 A part file is one 3D solid model. A part file has the file extension .ipt. The file extension .ipt is
an acronym for Inventor ParT. Working drawings can be created from the part file or part of an
assembly or presentation file.
3 Every new Inventor file must be created from an existing template file.
4 Inventor keeps the current file in RAM memory. If the computer cashes or the power fails, all the
work on the file, since the last time it was saved, will be lost. When the file is saved, Inventor saves
what is in RAM memory onto the disk drive. Ensure that the current file is saved frequently to avoid
losing production time. Saving it every 5 to 10 minutes is a good habit to get into.
5 The Browser bar displays current file's hierarchical structure.
6 The Status bar, located across the bottom of the Graphic window, is a very important part of
the operator's day-to-day work in Inventor.
7 Inventor must be instructed to end the current command. There are two methods available to
do this. The first is to press the Esc key on the keyboard and the second is to click Cancel or Done
on the right-click menu.

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

2 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

Inventor's User Interface ©2004 - 2020 Module 2

 Inventor ® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 3
Viewing the 2D Sketch and 3D Model

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:

1 Describe how to change the viewing position of the 2D sketch and the 3D model by zooming,
panning, and orbiting.
2 Apply the OPEN command to open existing Inventor files.
3 Apply the ZOOM, ORBIT, ZOOM ALL, PAN, and HOME VIEW commands or use the wheel on
the mouse to change the viewing position of the 2D sketch and 3D model.

Viewing the 2D Sketch and 3D Model

In Sketch mode, you are viewing and working on a two dimensional plane. In Model mode, you
are viewing and working in three dimensions the same way the human eye see real objects. It is
essential for you to be able to change the viewing position of the 2D sketch and the 3D model as
required. This is done by zooming, panning, and orbiting to change the viewpoint of the 2D sketch
and the 3D model.
Zooming
Zooming is the process of changing the viewable size of the sketch or model to make it appear
either smaller or larger. It is an important tool for you and is used extensively in the drawing and
modeling process. As it is zoomed, the size of the sketch or model not changed, Inventor is simply
adjusting the distance the object is from your eyes making it appear larger or smaller. I wondered
why the Frisbee was getting bigger, and then it struck me...
Panning
Panning is the process of moving the sketch or model around the Graphic window without actually
physically moving it from its location in space. It is an important tool for you and is used extensively
while working in Inventor.
Orbiting
Orbiting is the process of changing the orientation of the sketch or model in relation to your eyes.
Rather then changing the orientation of your eyes, Inventor orbits the sketch or model and your
eyes remain stationary. The model and sketch are not physically rotated or their orientation in
space changed. Orbiting is used extensively when working in Inventor.
Home View
The Home view is important to you while working in Inventor. It is the viewing position of the
sketch or model to a known isometric view. This view re-establishes your bearings to better
visualize the sketch or model because you are viewing it in a known viewing position.

Viewing the Sketch and Model ©2004 - 2020 Module 3

3-2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Inventor Command: OPEN

The OPEN button under the Get Started tab command is used
to open an existing Inventor file. Shortcut: CTRL+O

Inventor Command: ZOOM

The ZOOM command is used to zoom the sketch or model.
Shortcut: F3

Inventor Command: ZOOM ALL

The ZOOM ALL command is used display the current sketch or model to fit inside the Graphic
window.
Shortcut: HOME

Viewing the Sketch and Model ©2004 - 2020 Module 3

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 3-3

Inventor Command: ORBIT

The ORBIT command is used to orbit the sketch or model around the X, Y, or Z axes. The sketch
or model can be orbited while another command is active.
Shortcut: F4

Inventor Command: PAN

The PAN command is used to move the sketch or model in the Graphic window.
Shortcut: F2

Inventor Command: HOME VIEW

The HOME VIEW command is used to display the sketch or model in the home view.
Shortcut: F6

Viewing the Sketch and Model ©2004 - 2020 Module 3

3-4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Viewing the Model

Step 1 Start Inventor and check the current project. If required, set it to Inventor
Course.
Step 2 Click the Open icon. In the Open dialogue box, select the file:
Inventor Workalong 03-1.ipt . Note how the file name will appear in the File name: box as shown in
the figure. (Figure Step 2)

Figure Step 2

Step 3 If you are asked to convert the appearance, click Yes. (Figure Step 3).

Figure Step 3

Viewing the Sketch and Model ©2004 - 2020 Module 3

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 3-5

Step 4 The part will open and display in Model mode and appear similar to the figure.
(Figure Step 4).

Figure Step 4

Author's Comments: This is a 3D solid model that was

created in Inventor and supplied with the Inventor eBook.
Author's Comments: For this workalong, I am assuming that
you have a mouse with a wheel as the middle button. If you do
not have a wheel on your mouse, I strongly suggest that you
change it with a mouse that has one. It will save you a great
deal of drawing time.

Step 5 Move the cursor to approximately the center of the solid

model as shown in the figure. While keeping the cursor in the
center, rotate the wheel on the mouse toward you. Note how
the model appears smaller. (Figure Step 5A and 5B)
Author's Comments: Inventor will zoom the model using the
location of the cursor as the center point of the zoom. That is Figure Step 5A
why it is important to locate the cursor in the center of the
model when zooming.

Viewing the Sketch and Model ©2004 - 2020 Module 3

3-6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 5B

Author's Comments: If you don't have a wheel on your mouse, press F3 and hold it down.
While holding it down, press the left mouse button and move the mouse forward to achieve the
same results as Step 5.

When opening a file in Inventor, ensure that the Open File dialogue box is listing
the correct file type(s). To list part files which have the extension .ipt , ensure
that *.ipt file type is listed in the File of type: box as shown below. The * means
that all files that have the extension .ipt.

Viewing the Sketch and Model ©2004 - 2020 Module 3

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 3-7

Step 6 Move the cursor near the model and press and hold the
wheel down. A small Hand icon will replace the arrow cursor as
shown in the figures. While the Hand icon is displayed, move the
mouse to pan the model as shown. (Figure Step 6A, 6B, and 6C)
Author's Comments: If you don't have a
wheel on your mouse, press F2 and hold it
down. While holding it down, press the left
mouse button and move the mouse to achieve
the same results as Step 6.
Figure
Step 6B
Figure Step 6A

Figure Step 6C

The HOME VIEW command (F6) is a very important command. It is used to

change the viewing position of the 2D sketch or 3D model to a known isometric
view. By doing this, it re-establishes your bearings to a known viewing position.

Viewing the Sketch and Model ©2004 - 2020 Module 3

3-8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 7 Press F6 to return the model to its Home view. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Author's Comments: The Home View command (F6) is a very important command. It is used to
change the viewing position of the 2D Sketch or 3D model to a known isometric view. You can re-
establish your bearings to better visualize the sketch or model.

Viewing the Sketch and Model ©2004 - 2020 Module 3

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 3-9

Step 8 Press F4 and hold it down. While holding it down, move the cursor outside the orbit circle,
as shown below. The cursor will change as shown in the figures. Press and hold down the left
mouse button. While holding it down, move the mouse and the model will orbit. (Figures 8A, 8B,
and 8C)

Figure
Step 8B

Figure Step 8A

Figure Step 8C

Author's Comments: When the cursor appears as shown in Figure Step 8B, you are rotating the
model around the Z axis only.

Viewing the Sketch and Model ©2004 - 2020 Module 3

3 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 9 Press F4 and hold it down. While holding it down, move the Graphic cursor somewhere
inside the orbit circle. The icon will change in appearance as shown in the figures. Press the left
mouse button and while holding it down, move the mouse. The model will orbit. (Figure Step 9A,
9B, and 9C)

Figure
Step 9B

Figure Step 9A

Figure Step 9C

Author's Comments: When the cursor displays as shown in Figure Step 9B, you are orbiting the
model around all three axises, X, Y and Z at the same time.

Many Inventor commands have shortcut keys to speed the drawing process. For
example, the F4 is the shortcut for the ORBIT command. Using shortcuts are
faster than using a menu. It is best to learn and use the shortcuts whenever
possible to shorten the drawing time. Inventor shortcuts are shown in the Inventor
eBook and on tooltips in the Inventor menus.

Viewing the Sketch and Model ©2004 - 2020 Module 3

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 3-11

Step 10 Press F6 to return the model to its home view. (Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Author's Comments: Now that you know how to zoom, pan, and orbit the 3D model. Practice
doing this until you are comfortable changing your viewpoint of the model.
Step 11 Close the part without saving it.

While it is not absolutely necessary, it is very helpful to have a mouse with a

wheel as the middle button. Rather then using the ZOOM and PAN commands,
you can zoom and pan the sketch or model using the wheel. Using the wheel
rather then the commands to zoom and pan, will greatly improve your drawing
productivity.

The Key Principles in Module 3

1 It is essential for you to be able to change the viewing position of the 2D sketch and 3D
model. This is done by zooming, panning, and orbiting to change viewpoint of the sketch or
model.
2 The HOME VIEW command is a very important command. Use it to change the viewing
position of the 2D sketch or 3D model to a known isometric view. You can re-establish your
bearings to better visualize the sketch or model.
3 Use shortcut keys whenever possible to speed your production. Shortcut keys taught in this
module are Home - Zoom All, F2 - Pan, F3 - Zoom, F4 - Orbit, and F6 - Home View.

Viewing the Sketch and Model ©2004 - 2020 Module 3

3 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

Viewing the Sketch and Model ©2004 - 2020 Module 3

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 4
Sketching Lines

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:

1 Describe the Cartesian Coordinate System, parametric solid modeling, the Base sketch, and
geometrical constraints.
2 Describe snapping onto grids, lines, endpoints, and midpoints.
3 Describe and apply the PROJECT GEOMETRY command to project the Center Point onto the
Base sketch.
4 Following Inventors 2D sketching rules, describe and apply the LINE command to draw the
Base sketch of simple solid models.

Geometry Lesson
Points and Lines
A point is defined as a single XY coordinate. It does not have width, height, or depth. A line is the
shortest distance between two XY coordinates. Lines can be horizontal, vertical, or inclined. Lines
that are the same distance apart are called parallel lines. Perpendicular lines are at right angles to
each other or 90 degrees apart. See Figure 4-1 and 4-2.

Figure 4-1
Points and Lines

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4-2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure 4-2
Parallel and Perpendicular Lines

The Cartesian Coordinate System

To accurately draw two dimensional (2D) Base sketches, you must understand the Cartesian
Coordinate System.

Figure 4-3
The Cartesian Coordinate System

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-3

The Cartesian Coordinate System consists of two numbered lines crossing perpendicular to one
another at their zero values. The horizontal axis is the X axis and the vertical axis is the Y axis.
See Figure 4-3. A coordinate value is assigned to each location on the current construction plane.
Each coordinate value consists of a pair of numbers, the first is the X coordinate and the second
is the Y coordinate, written X,Y. The X and Y values are separated by a comma. For example,
X2,Y4 is the location 2 units to the right and 4 units up from X0,Y0 or 0,0.
The values can be either positive or negative. Positive numbers are default so the plus sign is not
required. If the value is negative, the minus sign must precede the number. For example, -3,5 is X
minus 3 and Y positive 5.

Parametric Solid Modeling

Inventor is a true Three Dimensional Parametric Solid Modeling system. A parametric solid model
is a 3 dimensional solid model designed with geometrical and dimensional constraints rather then
hard dimensions. A model designed in this way can then be modified by changing the dimensions,
and/or constraints during or after the design is complete. When one or more constraints are
modified, all other dependant constraints will automatically modify the model to conform to the new
constraints. Geometric constraints are taught in this modules and dimensional constraints are
taught in Module 5.

Geometrical Constraints
Geometrical constraints are used to apply geometrical relationships to the objects in the 2D sketch.
They specify the geometrical relationship that the objects have to the sketching plane and to one
another. Relationships like horizontal, vertical, parallel, or perpendicular are used. By applying
geometrical constraints the number of dimensional constraints required to fully constrain the model
is reduced. Applying the correct geometrical constraints prevents unwanted changes to a feature
when geometry or dimensions are modified.
Since the geometrical constraint symbol displays and the constraints are automatically applied as
the sketch is drawn, you have control on which constraints are applied to the objects as you are
drawing the sketch. Constraints can be added while creating the sketch or by editing the sketch
after the solid model is constructed. The geometrical constraints taught in this module are shown in
Figure 4-4. Additional geometrical constraints will be taught throughout the Inventor eBook.

If you draw an incorrect line, you can click the Undo icon to remove it and insert it
again. See Module 2, page 2-6. It is sometimes easier to undo rather than
deleting the line. This will only work if you click Undo icon immediately after you
inserted the line and have not exited the LINE command.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4-4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Geometrical Constraints
Constraint Symbol Icon Definition

A vertical constraint is applied to a line that lies on or is

Vertical parallel to the Y axis of the coordinate system.

A horizontal constraint is applied to a line that lies on or

Horizontal is parallel to the X axis of the coordinate system.

A perpendicular constraint is applied to two lines that

are at right angles to each other.
Perpendicular

A parallel constraint is applied to two lines that are

Parallel parallel to each other.

A reference constraint is applied to reference geometry

Reference None that is projected onto the sketching plane.

A coincidence constraint is applied to two points or

Coincidence None endpoint of lines that are constrained to same point.

Figure 4-4
Geometrical Constraints

Projecting Reference Geometry

Projected reference geometry is geometry that has its position fixed relative to the sketching
plane it resides on. Objects in the sketch are constrained with geometrical or dimensional
constraints to the reference geometry to constrain it to the sketching plane. If the objects in the
sketch are not constrained to the sketching plane, they will free float. A sketch that is not
constrained to the sketching plane can never be fully constrained.
Inventor allows reference geometry to be projected in many different methods and uses. Many of
these methods will be covered in the Inventor eBook. In this module, projecting the Center Point onto
the plane of the Base sketch is taught.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-5

Snapping
It is absolutely imperative that, when required, you snap to grids or locations on objects when
drawing 2D sketches. Snapping to these locations ensures that the sketch is drawn accurately and
constrained correctly. Inventor has many different snapping locations and they will be taught
throughout the Inventor eBook. For now, the snap locations shown in Figure 4-5 should be used
when drawing sketches. Study the figure before starting the workalong.

Snap Locations

Mode Icon How they appear in Inventor

Grid location but not on to an

Grid - Location in space object.
(Snapping to a grid location)

Endpoint - Midpoint - Snapping to the endpoint of an

Point object.
(Snapping exactly onto the
endpoint of an existing object)

Snapping to the midpoint of a

Endpoint Icon line
(Snapping onto the endpoint of
an existing object)

Snapping onto an object but

Midpoint Icon not at any specific location on
(Snapping onto the midpoint of the object.
an existing object)

On the Object Icon

(Snapping onto an existing
object but not an exact location
on the object)

Figure 4-5
Snap Locations and Symbols

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4-6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Inventor Command: PROJECT GEOMETRY

The PROJECT GEOMETRY command is used to project geometry to a fixed position on the 2D
sketch plane.
Shortcut: none

Inventor Command: LINE

The LINE command is used to draw lines on a sketch.
Shortcut: L

Inventor Command: LOOK AT

The LOOK AT command is used to change the users viewpoint to view the model or sketch
perpendicular to the selected object, edge, or plane.
Shortcut: PAGE UP

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-7

Lines
Lines are the drawing objects that are used the most when drawing 2D sketches. A line is
defined as the shortest distance between two XY coordinate locations. Once a line is drawn,
Inventor knows the location of its endpoints as well as the midpoint of the line. Other lines or
drawing objects can be drawn by snapping to those locations. See Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-6
A Line

Base Sketch
The Base sketch is the first 2D sketch drawn in a new part. After the Base sketch is complete, it is
extruded or revolved to create the Base model. Before drawing the Base sketch, you should study
the model being constructed to determine the best plane to draw it on. The best view to use is the
view with the most complex contour shape that does not contain arcs and curves. Draw the lines
using lengths close to the finished dimensions. They do not have to be 100% accurate in length.
The following rules should be followed when drawing the base sketch.
1 The objects in the sketch must meet exactly at their endpoints and cannot overlap.
2 The objects must form a perfect closed polygon and cannot contain any gaps.
3 The objects must have geometrical constraints applied to control the shape of the sketch.
4 Leave fillets and chamfers out of the original sketch. They can be added to the model after it is
created. This is taught in Module 15.

X0Y0Z0
The two bold grid lines on the sketching plane represents
the X and Y axis of the Cartesian Coordinate System. The
axis lines display can be either enabled or disabled. It
should currently be enabled. The horizontal line is the X
axis and the vertical line is the Y axis. The point where they
intersect is X0Y0Z0 of the sketch. Z is always zero since it
is a 2D sketch.
The location of X0Y0Z0 on the Base sketch is a very
important. You should pick its location on sketch
carefully since it dictates the location of X0Y0Z0 on the
Figure 4-7
completed model. See Figure 4-7.
X0Y0 Origin Location

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4-8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

The Coordinate System Indicator shows the X, Y, and Z

axis. The arrows always point in the positive X, Y, and Z
direction. The red arrow is the X axis , the green arrow is
the Y axis, the blue arrow is the z axis. See Figure 4-8 and
4-9.

Figure 4-8
Coordinate System Indicator

Figure 4-9
The Graphic window in 2D Sketch Mode

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-9

Author's Comments: Your Graphic window should appear black as shown in the upper figure below
while the Graphic window figures shown in future modules in the Inventor eBook will have a white
background as shown in the lower figure. I used the white background in the eBook because they
displays better.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Inventor allows files to be created in the units of inches, feet, millimeters,

centimeters, meters, and microns. In the Inventor eBook, the units that are used
are either inches or millimeters. When you start a new file, the template file you
select sets the default units for that file.

Drawing the Base Sketch

Step 1 Start Inventor. Ensure that the current project is Inventor Course.
Step 2 Click the NEW command and start a new part using the template:
English-Modules Part (in).ipt.
Step 3 Change to Model mode by clicking in the Finish sketch icon.
Step 4 Save the part file with the name: Inventor Workalong 04-1. The Graphic window should
appear similar to the figure. (Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 4

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-11

Step 5 Change to Sketch mode by right clicking Sketch1 in the

Browser bar and click Edit Sketch. (Figure Step 5A and 5B)

Figure Step 5A

Figure Step 5B

Author's Comments: The Graphic window is now in Sketch mode.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 6 The 3D model that you are constructing in this workalong is shown in the figure.
(Figure Step 6A)

Figure Step 6A

Author's Comments: Note the location of X0Y0Z0 icon. The icon's vertex is located at X0Y0Z0. The
red arrow points in the positive X direction, the green arrow points in the positive Y direction, and the
blue arrow points in the positive Z direction.
Author's Comments: The first thing that you must do before you draw the Base sketch is to
select the view with the most complex contour of the model. In this model, it is the top view as
shown in Figure Step 6B.

Figure Step 6B

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-13

Step 7 Press F6 to change to the Home view. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Author's Comments: You can draw a sketch in a 2D view or a 3D view. I show in the eBook
drawing in different views. You can draw the sketch in the view that works best for you.
Step 8 Click the PROJECT GEOMETRY command. Note the Status bar, it displays the command
prompt. Expand the Origin folder in the Browser bar and click Center Point. Press Esc to end the
command and note that after you do that, the Status bar displays the Ready prompt. That means
there is no current command. (Figure Step 8A, 8B, 8C, and 8D)

Figure Step 8A

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 8B

Figure Step 8C

Figure Step 8D

Step 9 Click the LOOK AT command. Move the cursor onto the Browser bar and click the XY
Plane. The Graphic window will change to display the top view. Press Esc to end the command.
(Figure Step 9A, 9B, and 9C)

Figure Step 9A

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-15

Figure Step 9B

Figure Step 9C

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 10 Press F8. It enables the display of the geometrical constraint icons. To this point, there is
only one geometrical constraint applied to sketch. It is the Reference constrain that was applied
when you projected the Center Point using the PROJECT GEOMETRY command in Step 8. (Figure
Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Author's Comments: The Reference constraint indicates that the Center Point is fixed to a
position on the 2D sketch plane. That means that it cannot be moved on the plane and fully
constrains the sketch up to this point.

Step 11 Press F9 to disable the display of the geometrical

constraint icons.

Author's Comments: In some computers, other background

functions may have taken over the F keys. In that case, right-
click somewhere in the Graphics window and then click on
Hide All Constraints.

Step 12 Move the cursor somewhere in the Graphic window and right
click the mouse. In the Right-click menu, ensure that Snap to Grid is
enabled. (Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 12

Author's Comments: Snap to Grid can be also enabled in the Status bar as shown below.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-17

Step 13 Click the LINE command. Note the Status bar prompt. Move the cursor to X0Y0Z0 and hold
it there. A green snap point will display. That means it is snapping to the Center Point geometry that
was projected in Step 8. While the green snap point is displayed, click the left mouse button.
(Figure Step 13A, 13B, and 13C)

Figure Step 13A

Figure Step 13B

Figure Step 13C

Author's Comments: When snapping to a point in Inventor, it is important to move slowly. If you
move the mouse too quickly after clicking the left mouse button, you may miss snapping exactly to
the desired point.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 14 Move the cursor about 4 inches along the positive X axis. Watch the Status bar and it will
display the length of the line as the cursor is moved. When it is about 4 inches long and the
Horizontal geometrical constraint symbol and the yellow snap point displays, click the left mouse
button. (Figure Step 14A and 14B)

Figure Step 14A

Figure Step 14B

Author's Comments: When snapping to a point in Inventor, it is important to move slowly. If you
move the mouse too quickly after clicking the left mouse button, you may miss snapping exactly to
the desired point.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-19

Step 15 Move the cursor about 2 inches in the positive Y direction. When the Perpendicular
geometrical constraint symbol displays at the same time as the yellow grid snap point, click the
left mouse button. (Figure Step 15A and 15B)

Figure Step 15A

Figure Step 15B

Author's Comments: Move slow and deliberate when snapping to objects or grids.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4 - 20 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 16 Move the cursor about 2 inches in the negative X direction. When the Perpendicular
constraint symbol displays and the yellow snap grid point displays, click the left mouse button.
(Figure Step 16A and 16B)

Figure Step 16A

Figure Step 16B

Author's Comments: You do not have to draw lines to their exact length. Just keep them close. It is
more important that you are snapping to points and applying the applicable geometrical
constraints.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-21

Step 17 Move the cursor about 2 inches in the positive Y direction. When the Parallel constraint
symbol and the yellow snap grid point displays, click the left mouse button. (Figure Step 17A and
17B)

Figure Step 17A

Figure Step 17B

Author's Comments: Do not be concerned if the Perpendicular constraint is applied in your

sketch. Either the Parallel or Perpendicular constrain will work in this sketch.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4 - 22 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 18 Move the cursor about 2 inches in the positive X direction. When the Perpendicular
constraint symbol and the yellow snap grid point displays, click the left mouse button. (Figure
Step 18A and 18B)

Figure Step 18A

Figure Step 18B

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-23

Step 19 Move the cursor about 2 inches in the positive Y direction. When the Perpendicular
constraint symbol and the yellow snap grid point displays, click the left mouse button. (Figure
Step 19)

Figure Step 19

Step 20 Move the cursor about 4 inches in the

negative X direction. When the Perpendicular
constraint symbol and the yellow snap grid point
displays, on the Y axis, click the left mouse
button. (Figure Step 20)

Figure Step 20

Author's Comments: Ensure that the yellow grid snap point displays on the Y axis.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4 - 24 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 21 Move the cursor to X0Y0Z0. When the green snap point and the Perpendicular
constraint symbol displays, click the left mouse button. (Figure Step 21)

Figure Step 21

Author's Comments: Ensure that green snap point displays before pressing the left mouse
button. The green snap point indicates that you are snapping to the projected Center Point.
Step 22 Press Esc to end the LINE command. Note that the Status bar prompts Ready
meaning there is no current command. (Figure Step 22)

Figure Step 22

When the Snap to Grid feature is enabled, the points selected

will snap to locations on the grid. As a beginner, it is best to
draw by snapping to the grid to control the location and size of
the sketch.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-25

Step 23 Click the LOOK AT command and change the view to the top or XY plane. If you have
trouble, see Step 9.
Step 24 Press F8 to display the geometrical constraint icons. They should appear similar to the
figure. (Figure Step 24)

Figure Step 24

Author's Comments: The constraint icons in your sketch may not match the figure exactly.

A correctly drawn Base sketch must form a closed polygon. There can be no
gaps. Each object in the sketch must meet exactly at their endpoints and cannot
overlap.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4 - 26 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 25 Move the cursor onto the Horizontal geometrical constraint icon. Note how the bottom line
display red to indicate that the constraint is applied to that line. (Figure Step 25)

Figure Step 25
Step 26 Move the cursor onto a Parallel geometrical constraint icon and note how another Parallel
geometrical constraint icon will highlight showing you which two icons match one another. Note how
the two parallel lines will also highlight to indicate that the upper line is constrained to the lower line
with a Parallel geometric constraint. (Figure Step 26)

Figure Step 26

Step 27 Move the cursor onto the Perpendicular geometrical constraint icon. Note how the two
lines highlight. The vertical line is constrained perpendicular to the horizontal line. (Figure Step 27)

Figure Step 27

Step 28 Move the cursor onto the small square icon at the bottom right
corner of the object. Note how two Coincident geometrical constraint
icons will display indicating both line's endpoints are at the exact same
XY location. (Figure Step 28)
Figure Step 28

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-27

Step 29 Press F9 to disable the display of the geometrical constraint icons. Press F6 to display the
Home view. The completed sketch should appear as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 29)

Figure Step 29
Step 30 Return to Model mode.
Step 31 Save and close the file.

Author's Comments:
The final sketch is shown in
black as your screen should.
Note that two lines are purple
and the remainder are blue. If
the two lines do not display
purple, redo the workalong.
You will learn the importance
of this in Module 5.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4 - 28 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Deleting Lines
There are two methods to delete any unwanted drawing object.
Method 1 Ensure that there is no active command and without entering a command, select the
drawing object with the cursor. If it is successfully selected, it will change color. Right click the
mouse. In the Right-click menu, click Delete as shown in Figure 4-9.

Figure 4-9
Deleting Lines

Method 2 Select the drawing object the same way as in Method 1. When the selected object
changes color, press the Delete key on the keyboard.
Author's Comments: Draw some random lines in Sketch mode. Practice deleting the lines a few
times until you can do it easily.

The Key Principles in Module 4

1 Inventor is a true Three Dimensional Parametric Solid Modeling system. A parametric solid
model is a 3 dimensional solid model designed with parameters and constraints rather then hard
dimensions.
2 Geometrical constraints are used to apply geometrical relationships on or between the objects
in the 2D sketch. They specify the geometrical relationship the objects have to the sketching plane
or one another.
3 It is absolutely imperative that, when required, you snap to grids or pre-defined locations on
objects when drawing 2D sketches. Snapping ensures that the sketch is drawn accurately and
constrained correctly.
4 The Base sketch is the first sketch drawn. The Base sketch is extruded or revolved to create
the Base model. Before drawing the Base sketch, you should select the view with the most
complex contour shape to draw the sketch on.
5 Projected geometry is geometry that has its position fixed relative to the sketching plane
where it originates. Drawing objects in the sketch are constrained or dimensioned to the
projected geometry to constrain it to the sketching plane.

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-29

Lab Exercise 4-1 Time Allowed: 40 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 04-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt Color: N/A Material: N/A

Step 1 Start a new part file with the template: English - Modules Part(in).ipt save the file with the
name: Inventor Lab 04-1 as shown above.
Step 2 Project the Center Point onto the Base sketch.
Step 3 Draw the Base sketch for the 3D model shown below and apply all of the necessary
geometrical constraints. Note the location of X0Y0Z0. (Figure Step 3A and 3B)

Figure Step 3A

Figure Step 3B
Base Sketch

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4 - 30 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author's Geometric Constrains: The following figure shows the Base sketch's geometric constraints
suggested by the author to help you learn how to construct and constrain sketches. It is only the
suggested method and if you can complete a fully constrained sketch using different construction
methods and constraints, that is what is important. You may want to compare your construction
method and constraints used with the authors.

Author's Base Sketch

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 4-31

Lab Exercise 4-2 Time Allowed: 40 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 04-2 Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt Color: N/A Material: N/A

Step 1 Start a new part file with the template: English - Modules Part(in).ipt and save the file with
the name: Inventor Lab 04-2 as shown above.
Step 2 Project the Center Point onto the Base sketch.
Step 3 Draw the Base sketch for the 3D model shown below and apply all of the necessary
geometrical constraints. Note the location of X0Y0Z0. (Figure Step 3A and 3B)

Figure Step 3A

Figure Step 3B
Base Sketch

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

4 - 32 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author's Geometric Constrains: The following figure shows the Base sketch's geometric constraints
suggested by the author to help you learn how to construct and constrain sketches. It is only the
suggested method and if you can complete a fully constrained sketch using different construction
methods and constraints, that is what is important. You may want to compare your construction
method and constraints used with the authors.

Author's Base Sketch

Sketching Lines ©2004 - 2020 Module 4

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 5
Extruding - Part 1

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module you will be able to:

1 Describe dimensional constraints, linear dimensions, driving and driven dimensions.

2 Apply the GENERAL DIMENSION command to insert the necessary linear dimensions to fully
constrain Base sketches.
3 Describe and apply the EXTRUDE command to extrude Base sketches to create the 3D Base
model.

Dimensional Constraints
Unlike geometrical constraints, that are used to apply geometrical
relationships between the objects in the sketch, dimensional constraints
control and report the size of the geometry. Dimensional constraints are
sometimes called parametric dimensions. To fully constrain a 2D sketch,
driving dimensions must be applied. A driving dimension is a parametric
dimension controlling the size of the object. Inventor will automatically
change the overall model to conform to the driving dimensions maintaining
The Base Sketch
the existing geometrical constraints that were assigned in the sketch.
Objects of the sketch that are not dimensioned will change to adapt when a
driving dimension is applied or an existing driving dimension is changed.
Add only the number of driving dimensions that are required to ensure that
the model maintains the desired size and shape. Inventor will issue a
warning when a dimension is added that over-constrains the sketch. Only
driven dimensions will be allowed to be added to a fully constrained sketch.
A driven dimension is a non-parametric dimension that does not constrain
the object. It only displays the current value of the geometry that it is applied The Extrusion
to. Driven dimensions are automatically enclosed in parentheses to
distinguish them from driving dimensions. You can add as many driven
dimensions to the sketch as you wish.
Base Model
After the Base sketch is complete and is fully constrained, it is ready to be
extruded or revolved to create the base model. The Base model is the solid
model created from the base sketch by extruding or revolving it. In this
module, only extruding the Base sketch to create the Base model is taught.
The simplest definition of an extrusion is it adds depth to the Base sketch to
create the Base model. See Figure 5-1. The Base Model
Figure 5-1

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

5-2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Inventor Command: EXTRUDE

The EXTRUDE command is used to extrude a 2D sketch to create or edit a 3D solid model.
Shortcut: E

Dimensioning Sketches
There are many different types of dimensions available to the operator to dimension sketches.
The different dimensioning types will be taught throughout the Inventor eBook. In this module,
inserting object linear dimensions is taught.
Linear Dimensions
A linear dimension is a dimension measuring the delta X or the
delta Y distance between the two XY locations or endpoints of a
line. See Figure 5-2. Linear dimensions are always either horizontal
(delta X) or vertical (delta Y). A linear dimension cannot be used to
dimension the true length of an inclined line. It will only dimension
the true length of a line if the line is horizontal or vertical. If both
endpoints of a line lie on the same axis, it can only be dimensioned
in one delta direction. Since all lines that were drawn to this point in
the eBook were either horizontal or vertical, linear dimensions will
Figure 5-2
be used for all of the dimensions inserted in this module.
Linear Dimensions Applied to
Horizontal and Vertical Lines

Object Linear Dimensions

To insert an object linear dimension, enter the GENERAL
DIMENSION command and move the cursor onto the line to be
dimensioned. When the two headed arrow icon appears, click the
left mouse button to select the line as shown in Figure 5-3. After
selecting the line, move the cursor in the direction to select the
location of the dimension. Click the mouse at the desired location
of the dimension.

Figure 5-3
Object Linear
Dimension Icon

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 5-3

Inventor Command: GENERAL DIMENSION

The GENERAL DIMENSION command is used to create driving or driven dimensions on a
sketch.
Shortcut: D

Dimensioning and Extruding the Base Sketch

Step 1 Using the OPEN command, open the part file: Inventor Workalong 04-1
that you completed in Module 4.
Step 2 Change to Sketch mode by editing Sketch1 in the Browser bar. Press F6 to change the
view to the Home view. (Figure Step 2)

Figure Step 2

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

5-4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author's Comments: Two lines of the sketch should appear purple and the remainder blue. The
purple lines are constrained while the blue ones are not. The reason the two lines are constrained is
because they have one endpoint snapped to the Center Point (X0Y0), which is constrained
(projected) to the sketching plane. In this workalong, you will be adding dimensional constrains to
fully constrain the sketch.

Step 3 Enter the LOOK AT command and when prompted, select one of the lines on the sketch as
shown in the figure. (Figure Step 3A and 3B)

Figure Step 3A

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 5-5

Author's Comments: For the beginner, it is sometimes easier to dimension the sketch while it is in
a 2D view. While this step is not necessary, I used it here to show you different methods of
working on the sketch.

Figure Step 3B

Step 4 Enter the GENERAL DIMENSION command by

pressing D on the keyboard. Move the cursor onto the left
vertical line. When the Two Headed Arrow icon appears,
select the line by clicking the left mouse button. (Figure
Step 4)

Author's Comments: It is best to dimension starting at

lines that snapped to the Center Point (X0Y0). Create
dimensioned in both directions moving around the sketch
until the sketch is fully constrained. Figure Step 4

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

5-6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 5 Move the cursor to the left and drag the dimension. Inventor will measure the delta Y
length of the line, since it is a vertical line, and display its actual length. In this case, it is 6.0
inches long. Since that is the desired length, accept it by clicking the green Check icon. (Figure
Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 5-7

Step 6 Continue to add linear dimensions to fully constrain your sketch. If the length of the lines are
correct, accept the dimension. If they are incorrect, change the dimension in the edit box to the
actual dimension of the line and then accept it by clicking the green Check icon. (Figure Step 6A,
6B, 6C, and 6D)

Figure Step 6A

Figure Step 6B

Figure Step 6C

Figure Step 6D

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

5-8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 7 When complete, there should be six driving dimensions. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Step 8 Add one more dimension as shown in the figure. Note that Inventor will issue a warning that
the dimension over-constrains the sketch. Click the Accept button to add it as a driven dimension.
(Figure Step 8A and 8B)

Figure Step 8A

Author's Comments: This step is not necessary to fully constrain the sketch. Driven
dimensions are added for reference only.

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 5-9

Figure Step 8B

Step 9 Without entering a command, move the cursor onto the 2.000 dimension as shown in the
figure. When the Move icon displays, click and hold the mouse button down and drag the dimension
to the new location shown in the figure. (Figure Step 9A and 9B)

Figure Step 9B
Figure Step 9A

Author's Comments: I use the Move icon to center the numbers in the dimensions after I
complete the sketch. This is not a necessary step but makes the sketch appear more
professional.

Instead of clicking the green Check icon to

accept the displayed dimension in the Edit
Dimension dialogue box it is faster to press
the Enter key.

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

5 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 10 The completed sketch should appear as

shown in the figures.
(Figure Step 10A, 10B, and 10C)

Figure Step 10A

Figure Step 10B Figure Step 10C

Author's Comments: All of the lines in your sketch should appear purple and the Status bar
should display Fully Constrained as shown in Figure Step 10C.
Step 11 Press F6 to change to the Home view. (Figure Step 11)

Figure Step 11

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 5-11

Step 12 Click the LOOK AT command and change the view to the top or XY plane.
Step 13 Press F8 to display the geometrical constraint icons. You figure should appears similar as
shown in the figure. (Figure Step 13)

Figure Step 13

Author's Comments: Your geometrical constrains may not match the figure exactly. Just
ensure that the sketch is fully constrained.

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

5 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 14 Enter the EXTRUDE

command. The Extrude dialogue box
will display. The model being drawn is
5 inches high as shown in the figure.
Set the Output box to Solid, the
Extents to Distance of 5 and the
Extrude Direction to positive Z as
shown in the figures. (Figure Step
14A and 14B)

Figure Step 14A

Figure Step 14B

Author's Comments: Note that Inventor will, by default, attempt to extrude in the positive Z
direction. This extrude direction can be reversed, when required.

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 5-13

Step 15 The completed solid model should now appear as shown in the figure.
(Figure Step 15)

Figure Step 15

Step 16 Find the Appearance pull-down menu and select the arrow to pull down the Color list.
Ensure that the library: Inventor Material Library is enabled at the bottom of the list.
(Figure Step 16A and 16B)

Figure Step 16A

Figure Step 16B

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

5 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 17 In the Appearance pull-down menu, select the

color: Aluminum Polished as shown in the figure. (Figure
Step 17)

Author's Comments: Ensure that you use the

Appearance pull-down list and not the Material pull-down Figure Step 17 list to the left of
the Appearance pull-down list. The Material pull-down list will be covered in Module 20.

Author's Comments: If your Inventor software does not include Inventor Material Library, you can
use either the Autodesk Material Library or the Autodesk Appearance Library to set the colors
specified in the eBook.
Step 18 The completed part or model should appear as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 18)

Figure Step 18

Author's Comments: The color only changes the model to appear as the assigned color. It does not
specify the material that the solid model is made from. That will be taught in Module 20.
Step 19 Save and close the part file.

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 5-15

A driving dimension is a parametric dimension controlling the size of the object.

Inventor will automatically change the overall sketch to conform to the driving
dimensions maintaining the existing geometrical constraints that were used in the
design. A driving dimension is shown below.

Driving Dimension

A driven dimension is a non-parametric dimension that does not constrain the object. It is
inserted for reference only and is always displayed enclosed in brackets as shown below.

Driven Dimension

When you open the Extrude dialogue box for the first time, the Marking menu will
display on top of the extruded model. You will not be using that menu in the
Inventor eBook.

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

5 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Click the bottom right arrow and enable

Pin Mini-Toolbar Position and Auto Fade.

Drag the Marking menu to bottom right corner of the Graphic window. It will remain there for the
duration while you working on the Inventor eBook. After you complete the eBook, you can use
change the settings to use the menu any way the works for you.

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 5-17

Knowing When the Sketch is Fully Constrained

It is very important to know when a sketch is fully constrained. A fully constrained
sketch is complete and is ready to be extruded or revolved to create or edit the solid
model. When the color scheme is set to High Contrast, the background is
black and the lines that are constrained will display purple. The lines that are not yet constrained
will display blue. When the sketch is fully constrained, all of the lines in the sketch will display
purple. Inventor also reports the current constraint status on the Status bar. See the figures below.

Sketch Partially Constrained

Sketch Fully Constrained

A special Pinned icon will display in Browser

bar on sketches that are fully constrained as
shown to the figures.

The Key Principles in Module 5

1 Unlike geometrical constraints, that are used to apply geometrical relationships of the objects
in a 2D sketch, dimensional constraints control and report the size of the geometry.
2 To fully constrain a 2D sketch, driving dimensions must be applied. A driving dimension is a
parametric dimension controlling the size of the object. Inventor will automatically change the
overall object to conform to the driving dimensions maintaining the existing geometrical
constraints that were assigned in the sketch.
3 A driven dimension is a non-parametric dimension that does not constrain the sketch.
4 It is very important to know when the sketch is fully constrained. When it is fully constrained, the
sketch is complete and it is ready to be extruded or revolved to create the Base model. When the
background color scheme is set to High Contrast the constrained lines will display purple and lines
that are not yet constrained will display blue. When the sketch is fully constrained, all of the lines in
the sketch will display purple.
5 After the Base sketch is complete and is fully constrained, it is ready to be extruded to create
the Base model. The Base model is the solid model created from the Base sketch.

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

5-18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 5-1 Time Allowed: 40 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 04-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: N/A Color: Zinc Chromate 2 Material: N/A

Step 1 Open the file: Inventor Lab 04-1.ipt that you saved in Lab Exercise 4-1 in Module 4.
Step 2 Using the SAVEAS command, save the file with the name: Inventor Lab 05-1.ipt.
Step 3 Insert the necessary driving dimensions to fully constrain the sketch. Add at least one
driven dimension. (Figure Step 3A, 3B, and 3C)
Step 4 Extrude the sketch to create the Base model and apply the color shown above.
(Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 3A
3D Model

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 5-19

Figure Step 3B
Base Sketch Dimensioned

Figure Step 3C
The Base Sketch Fully Constrained

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

5 - 20 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 4
Completed
3D Solid Model
Home View

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 5-21

Author's Geometric Constrains: The following figure shows the Base sketch's construction method
plus geometric and dimensional constraints suggested by the author to help you learn how to
construct and constrain sketches. It is only the suggested method and if you can complete a fully
constrained sketch using a different construction method and constraints, that is what is important.
You may want to compare your construction method and constraints used with the authors.

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

5-22 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 5-2 Time Allowed: 40 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 04-2 Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: N/A Color: Chrome - Polished Blue Material: N/A

Step 1 Open the file: Inventor Lab 04-2.ipt that you saved in Lab Exercise 4-2 in Module 4.
Step 2 Using the SAVEAS command, save the file with the name: Inventor Lab 05-2.ipt.
Step 3 Insert the necessary driving dimensions to fully constrain the sketch and add at least two
driven dimensions. (Figure Step 3A, 3B, and 3C)
Step 4 Extrude the sketch to create the Base model and apply the color shown above.
(Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 3A
3D Model

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 5-23

Figure Step 3B
Base Sketch Dimensioned

Figure Step 3C
Base Sketch Fully Constrained

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

5 - 24 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 4
Completed
3D Solid Model
Home View

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 5-25

Author's Geometric Constrains: The following figure shows the Base sketch's construction method
plus geometric and dimensional constraints suggested by the author to help you learn how to
construct and constrain sketches. It is only the suggested method and if you can complete a fully
constrained sketch using a different construction method and constraints, that is what is important.
You may want to compare your construction method and constraints used with the authors.

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

5 - 26 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

Extruding - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 5

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 6
Competency Test No. 1

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Within a one hour time limit, complete a written exam and a lab exercise.

Competency Tests
The Inventor eBook was written with competency based modules. What that means is that you
have not completed each module until you have mastered it. The Competency Test module
contains multiple choice questions and a comprehensive lab exercise to test your mastery of the set
of modules that you completed. There are no answers or keys supplied in a Competency Test
module since it is meant to be checked by your instructor. If there are any parts of this module that
you have trouble completing, you should go back and reread the module or modules containing the
information that you are having trouble with. If necessary, redo as many lab exercises required until
you fully understand the material.
If you are Completing this eBook Without the Aid of an Instructor
Complete the written test and the lab exercise.
If you are Completing this eBook in a Classroom with an Instructor
The instructor will give instructions on what to do after you have completed this module.

Competency Test No. 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 6

6-2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2019-11-02

Inventor
Competency Test No. 1
Open Book
Multiple Choice Questions
Select the BEST answer.
1 What keyboard key is used to end the current command?
A) CTRL
B) TAB
C) ESC
D) SHIFT
E) ENTER

2 An Inventor ______________ is designed to logically organize, store and manage the valid
links to the files that are created for each undertaking.
A) 3D Model
B) Project
C) Design
D) 2D Sketch
E) Menu

3 What command is used to zoom the model or the 2D sketch to display the complete model or
sketch in the graphic window?
A) ZOOM
B) PAN
C) ISOMETRIC
D) ZOOM ALL
E) LOOK AT

4 What are all files created in Inventor called?

A) Designs
B) Drawings
C) Files
D) 3D Models
E) 2D Sketches

5 What command is used to change the viewing position of the model or sketch to a known
home view or isometric view?
A) ZOOM
B) PAN
C) HOME VIEW
D) ZOOM ALL
E) LOOK AT

Competency Test No. 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 6

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2019-11-02 6-3

6 What is the name of the Inventor file that must be used by the operator when creating any
new file?
A) Design file
B) Drawing file
C) Model file
D) Template file
E) Sketch file

7 What term describes the process of applying geometrical relationships of objects to one
another in a 2D sketch?
A) Object snapping
B) Dimensional constraints
C) Parametric solid modeling
D) Driven dimensions
E) Geometrical constraints

8 What file extension is assigned to a part file?

A) .IPT
B) .IJP
C) .IAM
D) .IDW
E) .IPN

9 When drawing a base sketch that must be extruded to create the solid model there is a list of
rules that should be used. Which one of the following rules is false?
A) Select the view with the most complex contour shape.
B) Draw the lines using dimensions close to finished dimensions.
C) The objects in the sketch must meet at their endpoints and cannot overlap.
D) The objects in the sketch must have geometrical constraints applied to control the shape.
E) The objects in the sketch cannot be a closed polygon.

10 What term describes the process of controlling and reporting the size of the geometry in a 2D
sketch?
A) Object snapping
B) Dimensional constraints
C) Parametric solid modeling
D) Driven dimensions
E) Geometrical constraints

Competency Test No. 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 6

 6-4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2019-11-02

Lab Exercise 6-1 Time Allowed: 60 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 06-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt Color: Aluminum - Flat Material: N/A

Step 1 Start a new part file with the template: English-

Modules Part(in).ipt, and save the file with the name:
Inventor Lab 06-1, as shown above.
Step 2 Project the Center Point onto the Base
sketch.
Step 3 Draw the Base sketch for the object shown in
the figure and apply all of the necessary geometrical
constraints to maintain the shape of the sketch. Note Figure Step 3A
the location of X0Y0Z0. (Figures Step 3A and 3B) Base Sketch

Step 4 Insert the necessary driving dimensions to fully constrain the sketch. Add at least 1
driven dimension.
Step 5 Ensure that the sketch is fully constrained and all lines display purple. (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 3B
3D Model

Competency Test No. 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 6

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2019-11-02 6-5

Figure Step 5
Fully Constrained Base Sketch

Step 6 Extrude the sketch to complete the Base model and apply the color: Aluminum - Flat
(Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6
Completed Solid Model -
Home View

Competency Test No. 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 6

6-6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2019-11-02

Notes

Competency Test No. 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 6

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 7
Extruding - Part 2

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Describe how to construct a solid model using multiple sketches, linear dimensions, plus joining
and cutting extrusions.
2 Describe and apply the 2DSKETCH command to create 2D sketches on a solid model.
Extrude the sketches to either join them to or cut them from the solid model.

Point to Point Linear Dimensions

A point to point linear dimension is a dimension measuring the
delta X or the delta Y distance between two points of an existing
object or objects. The points, which are normally the endpoints of
a line, could also be center points of circles or arcs as you will
see in future modules. If the points both lie on the same X or Y
axis, the dimension can only inserted in one direction. If the
points do not lie on the same axis, you have the choice of
inserting either the delta X or the delta Y dimension. See Figure
Figure 7-1
7-1. The three steps used to insert a point to point linear
Linear Dimensions Applied
dimension are shown below.
To an Inclined Line

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

Inventor Command: 2D SKETCH

The 2D SKETCH command is used to create a 2D sketch on a sketching
plane or onto an existing 3D solid model.
Shortcut: S

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

7-2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Constructing a Solid Model Using Multiple Sketches

Step 1 Check the default project and if necessary,
set it to Inventor Course.
Step 2 Enter the NEW command to start a new part file using the
template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt.
Step 3 Save the file with the name: Inventor Workalong 07-1.
(Figure Step 3A and 3B)
Step 4 Edit Sketch 1 and enter the PROJECT GEOMETRY
command and project the Center Point onto the sketching plane.
Press Esc to exit the command. (Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 4

Figure Step 3A
Solid Model - Home View

Author's Comments: Two views of the model that you will be constructing in this workalong are
shown below. Note the location of X0Y0Z0.

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 7-3

Figure Step 3B
Solid Model - Rotated View

Step 5 Draw the Top view of the model starting at X0Y0Z0. This is the Base sketch.
(Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Author's Comments: Since the most contoured shape of the model is the Top view, this is the
view the should be drawn first.

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

 7-4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 6 Add 4 driving dimensions to fully constrain the sketch. Add 2 driven dimensions.
Step 7 Press F8 to display the constraints. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Step 8 The sketch should now be fully constrained and all the lines display purple on a black
background. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 7-5

Step 9 Press F6 to change the view to the Home view. Click the FINISH SKETCH command to
return to Model mode. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Step 10 Enter E to execute the EXTRUDE command and extrude the model 100 mm in the
positive Z direction. (Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

7-6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 11 The solid model should appear as shown in the

figure. (Figure Step 11)

Step 12 Click the 2D SKETCH icon and when prompted, select

the right side plane as shown in the figure. Exit the command
and the grid will display on the plane in Sketch mode. Press F6
to change to the Home view. (Figure Step 12A, 12B, and 12C)

Figure Step 11

Figure Step 12A

Figure Step 12B Figure Step 12C

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 7-7

Step 13 Enter L for the LINE command and start the first endpoint of the line by snapping onto the
plane edge line. (Figure Step 13)

Figure Step 13

Author's Comments: The exact location on the line is not important. Guess at a location about 25
millimeters from the top. It MUST, however, be snapped onto the edge.
Step 14 Draw three lines, applying perpendicular geometrical constraints and snapping back onto
the edge. Guess at the length of the lines making them approximately the correct length. (Figure
Step 14)

Figure Step 14

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

7-8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 15 Press F8 to display the constraint icons. (Figure Step 15)

Figure Step 15
Author's Comments: Your constraints may not match the figure exactly.

Step 16 Enter D for the GENERAL DIMENSION command.

Move the cursor to bottom corner of the model. When a
small point highlights, click the mouse. (Figure Step 16)

Figure Step 16

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 7-9

Step 17 For the second point of the dimension, click the end of the line as shown in the figure.
Locate and set the dimension to 25. (Figure Step 17A and 17B)

Figure Step 17A

Figure Step 17B

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

7 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 18 Add two additional dimensions to fully constrain it. (Figure Step 18A, 18B, and 18C)

Figure Step 18A

Figure Step 18C

Figure Step 18B

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 7-11

Step 19 Enter E for the EXTRUDE command. (Figure Step 19)

Figure Step 19

Step 20 Set the Extents to To, the type to Cut and select the back face to locate where to
extrude to. (Figure Step 20)

Figure Step 20

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

7 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 21 Your model should appear as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 21)

Figure Step 21

Step 22 Click the 2D Sketch icon and select the top plane to start a new sketch. Orbit the
model to match the figure. (Figure Step 22)

Figure Step 22

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 7-13

Step 23 On the sketch, draw a line across the corner. Make sure that you snap both ends of the line
to the edges. Guess at the distance from the corner. (Figure Step 23)

Figure Step 23

Step 24 Draw a line on the opposite side and dimension both lines using four point to point
dimensions. (Figure Step 24)

Figure Step 24

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

7 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 25 Your sketch should be fully

constrained as shown in the figure.
(Figure Step 25)

Figure Step 25

Step 26 Press F8 to display the constraint icons. (Figure Step 26)

Figure Step 26

Author's Comments: Your constraints may not match the figure exactly.

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 7-15

Step 27 Extrude the sketch using the To Next extents. Select the two profiles to extrude and
ensure that you enable the Cut icon. (Figure Step 27)

Figure Step 27

Drawing lines on the plane of a 3D model works a little different then drawing
lines on a 2D sketch before the model is extruded. In most cases, Inventor will
only allow you to draw one line segment at time when you are drawing a line on
the 3D model. Watch the prompts in the Status bar and you will know when you
have to reenter the start point again or you can draw the next segment
continuous.

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

7 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 28 Change to the Home view by pressing F6. Change the color of the completed model to
color: Light Steel Blue. (Figure Step 28)

Figure Step 28

Step 29 Expand the Browser bar. You can see that the model hierarchy shows the three
sketches and an extrusion of each one. (Figure Step 29)

Step 30 Save and close the file. Figure Step 29

The Key Principles in Module 7

1. A point to point linear dimension is a dimension measuring the delta X or the delta Y distance
between two points of an existing object or objects.
2 The 2D SKETCH command is used to create a 2D sketch on a sketching plane or onto an
existing 3D solid model.

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 7-17

Lab Exercise 7-1 Time Allowed: 45 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 07-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeters
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Steel Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the sketching plane.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and extrude them to produced
the solid model. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints to fully
constrain all sketches. (Figure Step 2A and 2B)
Step 3 Apply the color shown above. (Figure Step 3)
Step 4 Save the file with the name: Inventor Lab 07-1, as shown above.

Figure Step 2A
3D Model

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

7 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 2B
Suggested Base Sketch

Figure Step 3
Completed Solid Model -
Home View

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 7-19

Author's Geometric Constrains: The following three figures shows the base and additional sketch's
construction method plus geometric and dimensional constraints suggested by the author to help
you learn how to construct and constrain sketches. It is only the suggested method and if you can
complete a fully constrained sketches using different construction methods and constraints, that is
what is important. You may want to compare your construction method and constraints used with
the authors.

Author's Base Sketch

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

7 - 20 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author's Sketch

Author's Sketch

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 7-21

Lab Exercise 7-2 Time Allowed: 45 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 07-2 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeters
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Chrome - Polished Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the base sketching plane.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and extrude them to produced
the solid model. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints to fully
constrain all sketches. (Figure Step 2A, 2B, and 2C)
Step 3 Apply the color shown above. (Figure Step 3)
Step 4 Save the file with the name: Inventor Lab 07-2 as shown above.

Figure Step 2A
3D Model - Home View

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

7 - 22 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 2B
A Rotated View of the 3D Model

Figure Step 2C
Suggested Base View

Figure Step 3
Completed Solid Model -
Home View

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 7-23

Author's Geometric Constrains: The following three figures shows the base and additional sketch's
construction method plus geometric and dimensional constraints suggested by the author to help
you learn how to construct and constrain sketches. It is only the suggested method and if you can
complete a fully constrained sketches using different construction methods and constraints, that is
what is important. You may want to compare your construction method and constraints used with
the authors.

Author's Base Sketch

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

7 - 24 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author's Sketch

Author's Sketch

Extruding - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 7

 Inventor ® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 8
Multiview Drawings

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Describe multiview drawings, the glass box principle, the three standard views, object lines, and
hidden lines.
2 From a 3D pictorial of an object, draw a multiview drawing using the three standard views.

NOTE: If you understand multiview drawings, object lines, hidden lines, and you can draw
the three standard views of an object, skip this module.

Multiview Drawing
The drafting and design world uses a system of representing a three-
dimensional object by drawing two-dimensional views. It is called a
multiview drawing. To explain this system of drawing, the object shown
in Figure 8-1 will be used in this module. To draw a two-dimensional
view of one side of the object, place a imaginary plane parallel to the
side and project the view of the object perpendicular onto the plane. This
is called orthographic projection. Imagine the plane to a sheet of glass.
See Figure 8-2.

Figure 8-1
The 3D Model

Figure 8-2
Projecting the
Two-Dimensional View

Multiview Drawings ©2004 - 2020 Module 8

8-2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

The Glass Box Principle

To carry this principal further, place a plane on each side of the object for a total of six planes or
sheets of glass to form a glass box. This is called the Glass Box Principle, see Figure 8-3. Picture
unfolding the glass box onto a flat two-dimensional plane as shown in Figure 8-4. All six views
are now visible at the same time.

Figure 8-3
The Glass Box Principle

Figure 8-4
The Glass Box Unfolded

Multiview Drawings ©2004 - 2020 Module 8

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 8-3

The Three Standard Views

In almost all objects, three views are adequate to describe it. In fact, there are many objects that
only need two views and some that only need one view to describe it.
The six views are Top, Front, Right Side, Left Side, Rear, and Bottom. The three standard views
are the Top, Front, and Right Side. They must be drawn in the positions shown in Figure 8-5 and
they must be aligned.

Figure 8-5
The Three Standard Views

Picking the Standard Three Views

The three standard views are always selected
as shown in Figure 8-6.

Figure 8-6
Picking the Three Standard Views

Multiview Drawings ©2004 - 2020 Module 8

8-4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Drawing the Views

Usually it is best to draw the view with the most irregular shape first and then project lines to the
other two views. For the object in Figure 8-7, the front view should be drawn first and then the top
and right side views are projected.
Notice how the views have to align. Figure 8-7 shows two different methods of projecting lines
from the top view to the right side view or vise versa.
The distance between the views is not important.

Figure 8-7
Two Methods for View Layout and Alignment

Multiview Drawings ©2004 - 2020 Module 8

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 8-5

Drafting Lesson
Object and Hidden Lines
Lines and features that can be seen in the views are
drawn with continuous or solid lines. They are called
object lines. Even though they are called object lines, they
can be circular in shape. To completely describe an object
in a multiview drawing, the drafter must also show all lines
or features that are hidden in that view. They are called
hidden lines and their linetype is dashed. Study the
multiview drawing below and take note how the holes
going through the object are shown with hidden lines. See
Figures 8-8 and 8-9.

Figure 8-8
The Model

Figure 8-9
The Multiview Drawing of the Model

The Key Principles in Module 8

1 The drafting and design world uses a system of representing a three-dimensional object by
drawing two-dimensional views. This is called a multiview drawing.
2 The three standard views of a multiview drawing are the Top, Front, and Right Side.
3 When drawing a multiview drawing, the three standard views of an object must be drawn in the
correct position and must be aligned. The distance between the views is not important.

Multiview Drawings ©2004 - 2020 Module 8

 8-6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 8-1 Time Allowed: 15 Min.

Step 1 Sketch the Top, Front and Right Side views of the Object 8-1.
Step 2 Use one grid on the model equal to one grid on the drawing. See the example.
Step 3 When complete, check your answers on page 8-8.

Example

Author's Comments: Do this lab using paper and pencil. To print a paper copy of the graph
paper on your printer, you can configure and print it free of charge using the website
www.printfreegraphpaper.com. Set the graph paper to 1/4" Cartesian graph paper.

Object 8-1

Multiview Drawings ©2004 - 2020 Module 8

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 8-7

Lab Exercise 8-2 Time Allowed: 60 Min

Step 1 Sketch the Top, Front, and Right Side views of each model.
Step 2 Use one grid on the model equal to one grid on the drawing.
Step 3 Check your answers on page 8-8. Do not look at the answers until you have completed
your sketch.
Author's Comments: Do this lab using paper and pencil. To print a paper copy of the graph
paper on your printer, you can configure and print it free of charge using the website
www.printfreegraphpaper.com. Set the graph paper to 1/4" Cartesian graph paper.

Object 8-2

Object 8-3

Multiview Drawings ©2004 - 2020 Module 8

8-8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Object 8-4

Object 8-5

Object 8-6

Multiview Drawings ©2004 - 2020 Module 8

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 8-9

Multiview Drawings ©2004 - 2020 Module 8

8 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

Multiview Drawings ©2004 - 2020 Module 8

 Inventor ® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 9
Visualizing 3D Models

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Using multiview drawings, visualize and sketch isometric drawings of 3D models on isometric
grid paper.

Visualizing 3D Models
In the first six modules, all of the wireframe models that you constructed were referenced to a
given 3D view of the model. Since most technical drawings used in the drafting and design world
are 2D multiview drawings, 3D models must be able to be drawn using a multiview drawing as a
reference to find the model's shape and dimensions. To construct a 3D model, you must be able to
mentally visualize the 3D model using a multiview drawing as a reference.
.

A good way for you to learn to visualize a 3D model from a 2D multiview drawing is to first draw
the model as an isometric drawing. By doing this, it is easier to form a mental image from the
multiview drawing. After practicing this for while, you will be able to visualize and construct 3D
models without drawing the isometric first.

Figure 9-1
An Isometric Drawing

Visualizing 3D Models ©1993 - 2016 Module 9

9-2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

An isometric drawing is a 2-dimensional drawing that has the XYZ axis drawn at 120 degrees apart
as shown in Figure 9-1. In this module, drawing the isometric on an isometric grid will be taught. An
isometric grid has the grid lines drawn at 120 degrees as shown in Figure 7-2. Figure 9-3 shows a
rectangular box drawn on the isometric grid.

Figure 9-2
An Isometric Grid

Figure 9-3
A Rectangular Box Drawn on
an Isometric Grid

Visualizing 3D Models ©1993 - 2016 Module 9

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 9-3

Sketching an Isometric Drawing of a 3D Model - Part 1

This workalong demonstrates how the multiview drawing of the 3D model, shown
in Figure 9-4, is drawn as an isometric drawing.
Author's Comments: One grid on the multiview drawing is equal to one grid on the isometric
grid.
Author's Comments: Complete this workalong using paper and pencil. To print a paper copy of the
graph paper on your printer, you can configure and print it free of charge using the website:
www.printfreegraphpaper.com. Set the graph paper to 1/4" Isometric graph paper.

Figure 9-4
Multiview Drawing

Step 1 Using a pencil and eraser, complete this workalong to create the isometric sketch of the 3D
model. (Figure Step 1)

Figure Step 1

Visualizing 3D Models ©1993 - 2016 Module 9

9-4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 2 Sketch the rectangular box using the length, width, and height of the overall size of the 3D
model. The overall size of the 3D model is 6 grids long, 5 grids wide and 5 grids high. (Figure
Step 2)

Figure Step 2

Step 3 Cut the shape away, one view at a time. Draw the Front view first.
(Figure Step 3A and 3B)

Figure Step 3B
Figure Step 3A

Visualizing 3D Models ©1993 - 2016 Module 9

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 9-5

Step 4 In the Right Side view, remove the top left side of the object to match the multiview's
right side view. (Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 4

Step 5 In the Top view, remove the bottom right corner to complete the isometric drawing.
(Figure Step 5A and 5B)

Figure Step 5A Figure Step 5B

Visualizing 3D Models ©1993 - 2016 Module 9

9-6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Sketching an Isometric Drawing of a 3D Model - Part 2

This workalong demonstrates how the multiview drawing of the 3D model, shown
in Figure 9-5, is drawn as an isometric drawing.

Author's Comments: One grid on the multiview drawing is equal to one grid on the isometric grid.

Author's Comments: Complete this workalong using paper and pencil. To print a paper copy of the
graph paper on your printer, you can configure and print it free of charge using the website:
www.printfreegraphpaper.com. Set the graph paper to 1/4" Isometric graph paper.

Figure 9-5
Multiview Drawing

Step 1 Using a pencil and eraser, complete this

workalong to create the isometric sketch of the 3D
model. (Figure Step 1)

Figure Step 1

Visualizing 3D Models ©1993 - 2016 Module 9

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 9-7

Author's Comments: Solve one view at time. Pick the view with the hardest contour to start
with. In this case, start with the Front view.
Step 2 The figures show the necessary steps. Try to complete the isometric without looking at the
figure. (Figure Step 2A, 2B, 2C, and 2D)

Figure Step 2A

Figure Step 2B

Visualizing 3D Models ©1993 - 2016 Module 9

9-8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 2C

Figure Step 2D

The Key Principles in Module 9

1 An isometric drawing is a 2-dimensional drawing that has the XYZ axis drawn 120 degrees
apart.
2 To sketch an isometric circle, first consider which one of the three isometric planes it is located
on.

Visualizing 3D Models ©1993 - 2016 Module 9

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 9-9

Lab Exercise 9-1 Time Allowed: 90 Min.

Author's Comments: Complete this workalong using paper and pencil. To print a paper copy of the
graph paper on your printer, you can configure and print it free of charge using the website:
www.printfreegraphpaper.com. Set the graph paper to 1/4" Isometric graph paper.
Step 1 Using the 4 multiview drawings shown below, using pencil and eraser and the graph
paper you printed, sketch the isometric drawing of each 3D model.
Step 2 Using what was just taught, draw isometric drawings of the four objects: Object 9-1 to
Object 9-4. For the answers, see page 9-11. Try to visualize the 3D model by looking at the
multiview drawing and then draw the isometric. Do not look at the answers until you have done
your best to complete the isometric drawing of each object.

Object 9-2
Object 9-1

Object 9-3 Object 9-4

Visualizing 3D Models ©1993 - 2016 Module 9

9 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Object 9-1 Object 9-2

Object 9-3 Object 9-4

Visualizing 3D Models ©1993 - 2016 Module 9

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 9-11

Object 9-1
Object 9-2

Object 9-4

Object 9-3

Visualizing 3D Models ©1993 - 2016 Module 9

9 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

Visualizing 3D Models ©1993 - 2016 Module 9

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 10
2D Sketching Planes

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Describe the three predefined 2D sketching planes and the view of the model that they are on.
2 Construct solid models by drawing the Base sketch on either the Front or Right Side instead of
the default Top view.
3 Describe a consumed and an unconsumed sketch.

2D Sketching Planes
Up to this point in the eBook, the Base sketch has been drawn on
the XY plane. The XY plane is the Top view of the model and the
default plane as configured in the templates that are being used to
complete the workalongs and lab exercises in the Inventor eBook.
The models that have been constructed up to this point in the
modules were all designed so that the Base sketch was drawn on
the XY plane or the Top view. In this module, learning how to
construct solid models by drawing the Base sketch on either the
front or right side planes will be taught.
Inventor has p three predefined planes that can be used to draw Figure 10-1
the Base sketch. They are the XY, XZ, and YZ planes. The XY The 3D Model
plane is the Top view, the XZ plane is the Front view and the YZ is
the Right Side view of the model.
Keep in mind the rule that was taught in Module 4.
' It is best to draw the Base sketch on the plane that
has the most complex contour. Contours with arcs
and curves should be avoided '.
The Three Predefined Planes
To help visualize the three predefined planes used
in Inventor, the 3D model shown in Figure 10-1 is
used in this module. The glass box principle that
was taught in Module 8 is used to help you
visualize Inventor's three predefined planes. See
Figure 10-2.

Figure 10-2
The Glass Box

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

10 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Consumed and Unconsumed Sketches

A consumed sketch is a 2D sketch that has been extruded or
revolved to create a 3D solid model. An unconsumed sketch is
a 2D sketch that is blank or one that has not been extruded or
revolved.
The Browser bar will display which sketches have been
consumed and which ones are unconsumed. See Figure 10-3.
Sketch1 is unconsumed while Sketch2, Sketch3, and Sketch4
have been extruded and are consumed.

Figure 10-3
Consumed and Unconsumed
Sketches

A 2D sketch can be drawn in the orthographic view or in the 3D Home view. In

fact, any 3D orbited view can be used. When drawing in a 3D view, it is always
best to draw in the Home view since this helps you maintain a good mental
picture of the model.

2D Orthographic View
3D Home View

Inventor has three predefined planes that can be used to draw the Base sketch
on. They are the XY, XZ and YZ planes. The XY plane is the Top view, the XZ
plane is the Front view and the YZ is the Right Side view of the Base model.

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 10-3

Working with 2D Sketching Planes

Step 1 Start a new part file using the template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt.

Step 2 In Sketch mode, press F6 to change to the Home view. The Graphic window and the
Browser bar will appear as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 2)

Figure Step 2

Author's Comments: This is the Top view or the XY plane since that is Inventor's default plane.
Note that Sketch1 is always on the default plane.
Step 3 In the Browser bar, expand the folder: Origin as shown in the figure. Place the cursor on the
XY Plane. Note the orientation of the plane on the sketch. (Figure Step 3)

Figure Step 3

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

10 - 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 4 Place the cursor on the XZ Plane in the Browser bar. Note the orientation of the plane on
the sketch. The XZ Plane is the Front view. (Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 4

Step 5 Place the cursor on the YZ Plane in the Browser bar. Note the orientation of the plane on
the sketch. This is the Right Side view. (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 10-5

Step 6 Place the cursor anywhere in the Graphic window and right click the mouse. In the
Right-click menu, click Finish 2D Sketch.
Author's Comments: The object shown in Figures 10-3 and 10-4 is the model that you will be
constructing in this workalong.

Figure 10-3
3D Model - Home View

Figure 10-4
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

10 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author's Comments: Before starting the Base sketch you must pick the best view to draw it on. It
should, in most cases, be the view with the most complex contour. For this model, the best view to
use is the Front view or the XZ plane.
Step 7 Save the part file with the name: Inventor Workalong 10-1. In Model mode, expand the
folder: Origin in the Browser bar and right-click the XZ plane. In the Right-click menu, click New
Sketch as shown in figure. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Author's Comments: Since Sketch1 was not used, it is blank and is an unconsumed sketch.

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 10-7

Step 8 The Graphic window will change to Sketch mode. Change to the Home view. Note that in
the Browser bar a new sketch will appear and named Sketch2. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Author's Comments: Since Sketch1 was not used, it is blank and is an unconsumed sketch.

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

10 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 9 Project the Center Point onto the sketch plane. Draw the Base sketch for the model
applying all of the necessary geometrical constraints to maintain the shape of the sketch. Note
the location of X0Y0Z0. Insert the necessary driving dimensions to fully constrain the sketch.
(Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Author's Comments: All the lines in the sketch should display purple If they do not, start the
workalong over again.

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 10-9

Step 10 Press PAGE UP key to execute the LOOK UP/VIEW FACE command. Select one of the
lines to change the sketch to the 2D view of the the XZ plane. Press F8 to display the
geometrical constraint icons. They should appear similar to the figure. (Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Author's Comments: The constraint icons in your sketch may not match the figure exactly.

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

10 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 11 Right-click anywhere in the Graphic window. In the Right-click menu, click Finish 2D
Sketch to return to Model mode. (Figure Step 11)

Step 12 Save the part with the name:

Inventor Workalong 10-1. Extrude the sketch to create the solid
model as shown in figure. (Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 11

Figure Step 12

Step 13 Using the 2D SKETCH command, or even better the shortcut S, start a new sketch and
select the right side as the plane to draw it on. (Figure Step 13)

Figure Step 13

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 10-11

Step 14 The grid will display on the right side. It will be Sketch3 in the Browser bar.
(Figure Step 14)

Figure Step 14

Step 15 Draw three lines for the slot. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional
constraints to fully constrain the sketch. (Figure Step 15)

Author's Comments: Ensure that

you snap onto the edge when you
start the first line and end the third
line. By doing that, you only are
required to draw 3 lines to fully
constrain the sketch. See Module 7
if you have trouble doing this.

Author's Comments: All three

lines in the sketch should display
purple to indicate the sketch is fully
constrained. Do not continue on
with this workalong until the sketch
is fully constrained.

Figure Step 15

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

10 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 16 Press F8 to enable the display of the constraint icons. They should be similar to the
figure. (Figure Step 16)

Figure Step 16

Author's Comments: Your sketch my not match

the figure exactly. Ensure that your sketch fully
constrained.

Step 17 Press F9 to disable the display of the

constraint icons. Extrude the sketch using the To
next. (Figure Step 17)

Author's Comments: In some computers, other

background functions may have taken over the F keys.
In that case, right-click somewhere in the
Graphics window and then click on Hide All
Constraints.

Figure Step 17

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 10-13

Step 18 Start a new sketch on the top plane as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 18)

Figure Step 18

Step 19 Draw the 2D sketch on the new sketching plane and insert the necessary dimensions to
fully constrain it. (Figure Step 19)

Figure Step 19

Author's Comments: Ensure that you snap onto the edge. That way, you will only be required to
draw three lines to fully constrain the sketch.

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

10 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 20 Extrude the top sketch to complete the solid model. (Figure Step 20)

Step 21 Change the view to the Home view and apply the
color: Chrome - Polished Black. Orbit the model to check
the bottom. (Figure Step 21)

Figure Step 20

Figure Step 21

Step 22 Save and close the file.

The Key Principles in Module 10

1 Inventor has three predefined planes that can be used to draw the Base sketch on. They are the
XY, XZ and YZ planes. The XY plane is the Top view, the XZ plane is the Front view, and the YZ is
the Right Side view of the Base model.
2 A consumed sketch is a 2D sketch that has been extruded or revolved. An unconsumed
sketch is a 2D sketch that is blank or one that has not been extruded or revolved.

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 10-15

Lab Exercise 10-1 Time Allowed: 45 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 10-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt Color: Titanium - Polished Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the base sketching plane.
Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and extrude them to produced
the solid model shown below. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints
to fully constrain all sketches. (Figure Step 2A and 2B)
Step 3 Apply the color as shown above. (Figure Step 3)

Figure Step 2A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

10 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 2B
Suggested Base Sketch - Front XZ Plane

Figure Step 3
Completed Solid Model -
Home View

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 10-17

Author's Geometric Constrains: The following three figures shows the base and additional
sketch's construction method plus geometric and dimensional constraints suggested by the author
to help you learn how to construct and constrain sketches. It is only the suggested method and if
you can complete a fully constrained sketches using different construction methods and
constraints, that is what is important. You may want to compare your construction method and
constraints used with the authors.

Author's Base Sketch

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

10 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author's Sketch

Author's Sketch

Author's Comments: Your sketches may not match the figures exactly. Ensure that each
sketch is fully constrained.

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 10-19

Lab Exercise 10-2 Time Allowed: 45 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 10-2 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeters
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Zinc Chromate 2 Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the base sketching plane.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and extrude them to
produced the solid model. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints to
fully constrain all sketches. (Figure Step 2A and 2B)
Step 3 Apply the color shown above. (Figure Step 3)

Figure Step 2A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

10 - 20 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 2B
Suggested Base Sketch - Right Side
YZ Plane

Figure Step 3
Completed Solid Model -
Home View

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 10-21

Author's Geometric Constrains: The following figures shows the sketch's construction method
plus geometric and dimensional constraints suggested by the author to help you learn how to
construct and constrain sketches. It is only the suggested method and if you can complete a fully
constrained sketch using a different construction method and constraints, that is what is important.
You may want to compare your construction method and constraints used with the authors.

Author's Base Sketch

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

10 - 22 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author's Sketch

Author's Comments: Your sketches may not match the figures exactly. Ensure that each
sketch is fully constrained.

2D Sketching Planes ©2004 - 2020 Module 10

 Inventor ® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 11
Competency Test No. 2

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Within a one hour time limit, complete a written exam and the lab exercise.

Competency Tests
The Inventor eBook was written with competency based modules. What that means is that you
have not completed each module until you have mastered it. The Competency Test module
contains multiple choice questions and a comprehensive lab exercise to test your mastery of the set
of modules that you completed. There are no answers or keys supplied in a Competency Test
module since it is meant to be checked by your instructor. If there are any parts of this module that
you have trouble completing, you should go back and reread the module or modules containing the
information that you are having trouble with. If necessary, redo as many lab exercises required until
you fully understand the material.
If you are Completing this eBook Without the Aid of an Instructor
Complete the written test and the lab exercise.
If you are Completing this eBook in a Classroom with an Instructor
The instructor will give instructions on what to do after you have completed this module.

Competency Test No. 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 11

11- 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Inventor
Competency Test No. 2
Open Book
Multiple Choice Questions
Select the BEST answer.

1 What view of the model is the XZ plane in Inventor?

A) Left Side
B) Right Side
C) Top
D) Bottom
E) Front

2 Which one of Inventor's menus shows if a sketch is consumed or unconsumed?

A) Status bar
B) Standard menu
C) Browser bar
D) Panel bar
E) 2D Sketch panel

3 What command is used to draw a 2D Sketch on the existing solid model?

A) NEW
B) LOOK AT
C) 2D SKETCH
D) EXTRUDE
E) LINE

4 Which plane is the default plane used in the templates supplied with the Inventor eBook?
A) ZY
B) XZ
C) XY
D) YX
E) YZ

5 Which of the following best describes a consumed 2D sketch?

A) It is blank.
B) It has been extruded or revolved to create a 3D feature.
C) It has been deleted.
D) It cannot be edited.
E) It has been dimensioned.

Competency Test No. 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 11

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 11- 3

6 In Figure 11-1, what is the purpose of the middle icon in the EXTRUDE dialogue box?
A) Cut
B) Subtract
C) Add
D) Join
E) Intersect

7 What kind of dimension does a linear dimension insert?

Figure
A) Line 11-1
B) Object
C) Horizontal only
D) Vertical only
E) Delta X or Delta Y

8 What view of the model is the XY plane in Inventor?

A) Left Side
B) Right Side
C) Top
D) Bottom
E) Front

9 On the color scheme High Contrast, what color will the sketch appear when it is fully
constrained?
A) Black
B) White
C) Purple
D) Blue
E) Green

10 What view of the model is the YZ plane in Inventor?

A) Rotated
B) Right Side
C) Top
D) Bottom
E) Front

Competency Test No. 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 11

 11- 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 11-1 Part B Time Allowed: 60 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 11-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeters
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Orange Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the Base sketch.

Figure Step 2A
Dimensioned Drawing

Competency Test No. 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 11

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 11- 5

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and extrude them to produced
the solid model. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints to fully
constrain all sketches. Ensure that all lines on all sketches display purple on a black background.
(Figure Step 2A and 2B)
Step 3 Apply the color shown above. (Figure Step 3A, 3B, and 3C)

Figure Step 2B Figure Step 3A

Suggested Base View - Completed Solid Model -
Front - XZ Plane Home View

Figure Step 3A Figure Step 3A

Solid Model - Rotated View Solid Model - Rotated View

Competency Test No. 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 11

11- 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

Competency Test No. 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 11

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 12
Circles

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:

1 Describe construction objects and their use in a 2D sketch.

2 Describe drawing circles and offsets in a 2D sketch.
3 Apply the CENTER POINT CIRCLE and OFFSET commands to complete 2D sketches.

Geometry Lesson
Circles
A circle is defined as a closed curve in which all points are the same distance from its center
point. The center point is a single XY coordinate.
A circle is 360 degrees and can be divided into four quadrants. All points on a circle are at a
given distance from is center point. The distance between any of the points and the center is
called the radius.
Study the drawings in Figure 12-1, 12-2,
12-3, and 12-4 for a description of the
geometry of a circle.

Figure 12-1
Geometry of a Circle - Part 1

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

12 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure 12-2
Geometry of a Circle - Part 2

Figure 12-3
Geometry of a Circle - Part 3

Figure 12-4
Geometry of a Circle - Part 4

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 12-3

Drafting Lesson
Reading Dimensions for Circles and Arcs
When reading the dimensions for circles and arcs, consider the following:
Circles are dimensioned as diameters. For example: 2.0 DIA.
Arcs are dimensioned as radii.
For example: 1.5 R
When there is more than one circle of the
same diameter, they are only dimensioned
once. For example:
0.5 DIA., 4 PLACES
Sometimes multiple arcs are dimensioned as
typical (TYP.). For example: 2.0 R TYP. This
simply means that there is at least one
additional arc of the same size, See Figure
12-5.
Figure 12-5
Typical Drawing

Inventor Command: CENTER POINT CIRCLE

The CENTER POINT CIRCLE command is used to draw a circle by entering the location of its
center point and its radius.
Shortcut: C

Inventor Command: OFFSET

The OFFSET command is used to draw an object parallel to an existing object.
Shortcut: O

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

12 - 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Construction Objects
Construction objects are objects that are drawn in the sketch to assist you to complete the sketch
but will be ignored by Inventor when the sketch is extruded or revolved to create the Base model.
Geometrical and dimensional constraints can be applied to construction objects the same as they
are to drawing objects. Construction objects and drawing objects only differ in the properties of the
objects. They are both drawn and manipulated the same way in a 2D sketch.
There are two methods of creating construction objects as follows:
Method 1 Enable the Construction icon, see Figure 12-6, and then draw the objects. All objects
drawn while the Construction icon is enabled, will be created as construction objects.

Figure 12-6

Method 2 Draw the object with the Construction icon disabled. After the drawing object(s) is
created, select it. While it is selected, click the Construction icon. Construction objects will
appear as a dashed lines as shown in Figure 12-7.

Figure 12-7
Construction Objects

Geometrical Constraints
Constraint Symbol Icon Definition

An equal constraint resizes objects to be equal in size

Equal to a selected existing object.

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 12-5

Snap Symbols
Mode Icon How they appear in Inventor

Intersection
(Snaps to the intersection of
two objects)

Some commands require you to select one or more drawing objects when there
is no command active. For example, the DELETE command. The Status bar will
display Ready when there is no command active. To select one object at a time,
select the object by clicking it with the left mouse button. The selected object will
highlight and change color. To select more then one object at time,
hold down either the CTRL or SHIFT key while selecting the objects. When all objects have been
selected, click the command icon or enter the command on the command line.

Drawing Circles and Cylindrical Models

Step 1 Check the default project and if necessary, set it to Inventor Course.
Step 2 Enter the NEW command to start a new part file using the template:
English-Modules Part (in).ipt.
Step 3 Save the file with the name: Inventor Workalong 12-1. (Figure Step 3A and 3B)

Figure Step 3A
3D Model
Home View

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

12 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 3B
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Step 4 Draw the Base sketch on the Top view. Since this is the XY plane (the default plane), use
Sketch1.
Step 5 Project the Center Point onto the sketching plane.

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 12-7

Step 6 Enter the CENTER POINT CIRCLE command and draw a 4.0 inch diameter circle.
Watch the Status bar. The first prompt will be to select the center point for the circle. For the
center point location, snap to the Center Point that was projected onto the sketching plane.
Select the radius by guessing 2 inches from the center. (Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6

Author's Comments: You can guess at the location of the radius since you will be constraining its
size with a dimension later. Ensure that the green dot appears when you snap to the Center
Point.
Step 7 Click the OFFSET command and when prompted, select the circle. Right-click the mouse.
In the Right-click menu, ensure that Loop Select is enabled. Move the mouse towards the
center, guess at the diameter size of the 1.0 inch. (Figure Step 7A, 7B, and 7C)

Figure Step 7A
Figure Step 7B
Figure Step 7C

Author's Comments: Using the OFFSET command to draw the two additional circles will
automatically constrain their center to the center of the offset circle.

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

12 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 8 Click the Construction icon to enable it. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Step 9 Using what you just learned, enter the OFFSET command and offset the large circle to
draw the 3 inch diameter construction circle. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Author's Comments: By inserting a construction circle, it will not be part of the extrusion later.
Guess at the radius as you will be constraining its size with a dimension later.
Step 10 Click the Tools menu. Click the Applications Options icon to open the Applications
Options dialogue box. Enable the Sketch tab. In the Display area, disable Axes. Click OK to
close the dialogue box. (Figure Step 10A and 10B)

Figure Step 10A

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 12-9

Figure Step 10B

Author's Comments: I am having you disable the display of the axes as they get in the way of
drawing this sketch. If you wish, you can leave them disabled or enable their display after you
complete this workalong.
Step 11 Dimension the three circles. Press F8 to display the geometrical constraint icons.
(Figure Step 11)

Figure Step 11

Author's Comments: Your sketch should be fully constrained.

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

12 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 12 Using the LINE command, draw a line by first snapping to the Center Point and ending it
by snapping onto the circle. Make sure that the Horizontal constraint icon displays when you are
drawing the line. The constraint icons should appear similar to the figure. (Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 12

Author's Comments: Since the Construction Line icon is enabled from Step 8, this will be a
construction line. In other words, used to construct and constrain the sketch but not included in
the extruded.
Author's Comments: Ensure that you snap to the Center Point and onto the circle
circumference for the other end.

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 12-11

Step 13 Using the LINE command, draw three additional construction lines by first snapping to the
Center Point and ending them by snapping onto the circle. The constraint icons should appear
similar to the figure. (Figure Step 13)

Figure Step 13

Author's Comments: Your sketch should be fully constrained.

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

12 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 14 Press F8 to display the constraint icons. (Figure Step 14)

Figure Step 14

Step 15 Click the Construction icon to disable it.

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 12-13

Step 16 Enter the CENTER POINT CIRCLE command. With the cursor in the sketching window,
right-click the mouse. In the Right-click menu, select Intersection. Select the construction circle and
then the construction line. Notice how the cursor will display a plus sign beside it. When you select
the line, the green snap indicator will display. Select a location for the radius of the circle by
guessing at its size. (Figure Step 16A, 16B, 16C, and 16D)

Figure Step 16A

Figure 16B

Figure Step 16C

Figure Step 16D

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

12 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 17 Using what you just learned in Step 14, insert the 3 additional circles. For now, the
diameter of the circles is not important. (Figure Step 17)

Figure Step 17

Author's Comments: Ensure that you snap to the intersection of the construction circle and the
construction line when you locate the center for each circle.
Step 18 Dimension one circle only. (Figure Step 18)

Figure Step 18

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 12-15

Step 19 Ensure that there is no active command and select the Equal constrain icon.
(Figure Step 19)

Figure Step 19

Step 20 For the first circle, select the top

(dimensioned circle) and for the second
circle select one of the other circles. It
will constrain the second circle as equal
in size to the dimensioned circle. (Figure
Step 20A and 20B)

Figure Step 20A

Figure Step 20B

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

12 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 21 Using what you learned in Step 20, constrain the additional 2 circles with the Equal
constraint to equal the dimensioned circle. The constraint icons should appear similar to the
figure. (Figure Step 21)

Figure Step 21

Step 22 Change the view to the Home view. The sketch should be fully constrained and display
purple. (Figure Step 22)

Figure Step 22

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 12-17

Step 23 Extrude the sketch as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 23A and 23B)

Figure Step 23A

Figure Step 23B

Step 24 Start a new sketch on the top plane

of the model. Using the OFFSET command,
offset the outside diameter of the object to
insert a 1.5 inch circle. Add the diameter
dimension as shown in figure.
(Figure Step 24)
Author's Comments: Since you used the
OFFSET command to draw the circle, the
center of the circle will be automatically
constrained and the sketch will be fully
Figure Step 24 constrained.

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

12 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 25 Extrude the sketch as shown in figure. (Figure Step 25)

Figure Step 25

Author's Comments: Notice how the Join icon is enabled. This is because you are joining onto the
existing solid.

Step 26 Change the color to: Chrome -Polished Black.

(Figure Step 26)

Step 27 Save and close the file. Figure Step 26

The Key Principles in Module 12

1 Construction objects are objects that are drawn in the sketch to assist you in completing the
sketch but will be ignored by Inventor when the sketch is extruded or revolved. Geometrical and
dimensional constraints can be applied to construction objects the same as they are to drawing
objects. Construction objects and drawing objects only differ in the properties of the objects. They
are both drawn and manipulated the same way in a 2D sketch.
2 To select more then one object at time, hold down either the CTRL or SHIFT key while
selecting the objects.

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 12-19

Lab Exercise 12-1 Time Allowed: 45 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 12-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeter
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Aluminum - Flat Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the Base plane.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and extrude them to produced
the solid model shown below. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints
to fully constrain all sketches. (Figure Step 2A and 2B)
Step 3 Apply the color shown above. (Figure Step 3A and 3B)
Hint: The small holes do NOT go all the way through the
flange.

Figure Step 2A
Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 2B
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

12 - 20 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 3A
Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 3B
Suggested Base Sketch -
Front - XZ Plane

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 12-21

Author's Geometric Constrains: The following figures shows the sketch's construction method plus
geometric and dimensional constraints suggested by the author to help you learn how to construct
and constrain sketches. It is only the suggested method and if you can complete a fully
constrained sketch using a different construction method and constraints, that is what is important.
You may want to compare your construction method and constraints with the authors.
.

Base Sketch

Sketch 2

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

 12-22 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 12-2 Time Allowed: 45 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 12-2 Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt Color: White Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the base plane.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and extrude them to produced
the solid model shown below. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints
to fully constrain all sketches. (Figure Step 2A and 2B)
Step 3 Apply the color shown above. (Figure Step 3A and 3B)

Figure Step 2A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 12-23

Hint:: Draw the base sketch on the Front view or XZ plane.

Figure Step 2B
Suggested Base Sketch -
Front - XZ Plane Figure Step 3A
Completed Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 3B
Completed Solid Model - Bottom View

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

12 - 24 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

Circles ©2004 - 2020 Module 12

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 13
Arcs

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:

1 Describe the geometry of an arc and how arcs are drawn in Inventor.
2 Describe how to snap to midpoints of lines.
3 Apply the CENTER POINT ARC command to draw arcs in 2D sketches.

Drawing Arcs
There are three commands available to draw arcs in Inventor. In this module, drawing arcs using
the CENTER POINT ARC command will be taught. Similar to the CIRCLE command, the CENTER
POINT ARC command also requires you to select the center point and the radius. Drawing arcs
additionally require you to locate the start point and end point or the arc. Arcs can be constructed
clockwise or counterclockwise.

Geometry Lesson
Arcs
An ARC is defined as an open curve in which all points are the same distance from its center point.
Study the drawings in Figure 13-1 and 13-2.for a description of the geometry of an arc.

Figure 13-1
Geometry of an Arc - Part 1

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

13 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure 13-2
Geometry of an Arc - Part 2

Inventor Command: CENTER POINT ARC

The CENTER POINT ARC command is used to draw an arc by entering the location of its center
point, radius, start point and end point.
Shortcut: A

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 13-3

Snap Symbols
Mode Icon How it appears in Inventor

Midpoint
(Snaps to the midpoint of an
object)

Geometrical Constraint - Coincident

Constraint Icon Definition

A coincidence constraint indicates that two

points or endpoints of an object are exactly at
Coincident
the same XY location.

Drawing Models with Arcs

Step 1 Check the default
project and if necessary, set it to Inventor Course.
Step 2 Enter the NEW command to start a new part file using the template:
Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt.
Step 3 Save the file with the name: Inventor Workalong 13-1. (Figure Step 3A and 3B)

Figure Step 3A
3D Model - Home View

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

13 - 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 3B
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

When drawing arcs, do your best to tie the center point, the start point, and the
end point to existing geometry. It will decrease the number of dimensions that are
required to constrain the arc.

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 13-5

Step 4 Edit Sketch1. Project the Center Point onto the sketch.
Step 5 Draw a sketch of the Top view of the model. Apply all of the geometrical and
dimensional constraints to fully constrain it. (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Author's Comments: Your geometrical and dimensional constrains may not match the figure
exactly. Just ensure that your sketch is fully constrained.
Step 6 Extrude the sketch in the positive Z direction. (Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

13 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 7 Start a new sketch on the right side as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Step 8 Enter the CENTER POINT ARC command and when prompted for the center point, right
click the mouse. In the Right-click menu, select Midpoint. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 13-7

Step 9 Move the cursor onto the vertical edge. When the green snap icon appears, click the left
mouse button. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Step 10 Move the cursor approximately 10 mm along the edge and when the Snap onto icon
displays, click the mouse. (Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

13 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 11 Move the cursor to the other side of the

center and when the Snap onto icon displays, click
the mouse. (Figure Step 11)

Figure Step 11

Step 12 Press F8 to display the constraint icons.

(Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 12

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 13-9

Step 13 Move the cursor onto the Coincident icon and note the display of two coincident icons.
(Figure Step 13)

Figure Step 13

Author's Comments: When two constraint icons display, it means that the endpoint of the arc is
exactly on the line and the line is exactly on the endpoint of the arc.

Author's Comments: Note that the bottom endpoint of the arc is not constrained with a
Coincident constraint.

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

13 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 14 In the Graphic window, right click the mouse. In the Right-click menu, click Create
Constraint and then Coincident. (Figure Step 14)

Author's Comments: The Ribbon menu can

also be used to create a constraint.

Figure Step 14

Step 15 Select the edge for the first point. (Figure Step 15)

Figure Step 15

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 13-11

Step 16 For the second point, move the cursor onto the endpoint of the arc. When a small red
point will displays, click the mouse. (Figure Step 16)

Figure Step 16

Step 17 Press F8. Locate the cursor onto the

Coincident icon and note the display of two coincident
icons. (Figure Step 17)

Author's Comments: Both ends of the arc are now

geometrically constrained to the edge of model.
Figure Step 17

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

13 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 18 The arc should now display purple

indicating it is fully constrained. (Figure Step 18)

Figure Step 18

Step 19 Finish the sketch and extrude the arc by using the Cut option. (Figure Step 19)

Figure Step 19

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 13-13

Step 20 Start a new sketch on the front side. (Figure Step 20)

Figure Step 20

Step 21 Draw a line perpendicular from the midpoint of

the edge. (Figure Step 21)

Author's Comments: Ensure that you snap to the

midpoint of the edge.

Figure Step 21

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

13 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 22 Change the line to a construction line by selecting the line and then click the
Construction icon. (Figure Step 22A, 22B, and 22C)

Figure Step 22B

Figure Step 22A

Figure Step 22C

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 13-15

Step 23 Offset the construction line on each side. (Figure Step 23)

Figure Step 23

Step 24 Insert two dimensions. (Figure Step 24)

Figure Step 24

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

13 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 25 Draw an arc locating the center at the end of the construction line. (Figure Step 25)

Figure Step 25

Step 26 Insert the required dimensions to constrain the sketch. (Figure Step 26)

Figure Step 26

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 13-17

Step 27 Enable the display of the constraint icons. (Figure Step 27)

Figure Step 27

Step 28 Use what you learned in Step 14

to 17, create the additional Coincident
constraints to fully constrain the sketch.
(Figure Step 28)

Figure Step 28

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

13 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 29 Extrude the sketch to complete the model. (Figure Step 29)

Figure Step 29

Step 30 Change the color to: Titanium - Polished. (Figure Step 30).

Figure Step 30

Step 31 Save and close the file.

The Key Principles in Module 13

1. There are three commands available to draw arcs in Inventor. Similar to the CIRCLE
command, the CENTER POINT ARC command also requires you to select the location of the
center point and the radius. Drawing arcs additionally requires you to locate the start point and
end point or the arc. Arcs can be constructed clockwise or counterclockwise.
2 When drawing arcs, do your best to tie the center point, the start point, and the end point to
existing geometry. This will decrease the number of dimensions that are required to constrain the
arc.

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 13-19

Lab Exercise 13-1 Time Allowed: 45 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 13-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt Color: Chrome - Polished Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the Base sketch.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and extrude them to produced
the solid model shown below. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints
to fully constrain all sketches. (Figure Step 2A and 2B)
Step 3 Apply the color shown above. (Figure Step 3)

Figure Step 2A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

13 - 20 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 2B
Suggested Base Sketch
- Right Side - YZ Plane

Figure Step 3
Solid Model - Home View

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 13-21

Lab Exercise 13-2 Time Allowed: 45 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 13-2 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeters
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Copper - Satin Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the Base sketch.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and extrude them to produced
the solid model shown below. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints
to fully constrain all sketches. (Figure Step 2A and 2B)
Step 3 Apply the color shown above. (Figure Step 3)

Figure Step 2A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

13 - 22 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 2B
Suggested Base Sketch -
Front - XZ Plane

Figure Step 3
Completed Solid Model -
Home View

Arcs ©2004 - 2020 Module 13

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 14
Revolving

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:

1 Describe a centerline object and explain how it is inserted and used in a 2D Sketch.
2 Describe how a Base sketch is revolved with and without the use of a centerline to create a
solid model.
3 Apply the REVOLVE command to create a solid model from a Base sketch.

Revolving
When drawing symmetrical objects it is much easier to create the model by revolving the Base
sketch around an axis rather then extruding it. The axis, which can be one of the lines in the
sketch or a centerline, must always be located in the center of the symmetrical model. The
sketch can be revolved any angle between 0 and 360 degrees.
In this module, the basic features of the REVOLVE command
are taught. The Inventor Advanced eBook will cover the more
advanced features.

Figure 14-1
A 2D Sketch Revolved Around a
Line in the Sketch

The models in Figure 14-1 and 14-2 were created

by revolving the same Base sketch around an axis.
Take note how the two solid models that were
created using the same sketch are quite different.
In Figure 14-1, the line on left side of the sketch
Figure 14-2 was used as the axis while in Figure 14-2, it was
The Same 2D Sketch Revolved the centerline that was added to the sketch and
around a Centerline used as an axis or revolution.

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

14- 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Inventor Command: REVOLVE

The REVOLVE command is used to create a solid model by revolving the Base sketch around an
axis.
Shortcut: R

Centerlines
A centerline is a line with its properties set to act as a centerline. In the REVOLVE command, a
centerline is automatically recognized as the axis for the revolution. The two methods of drawing a
centerline, which is similar to drawing construction a line, are as follows:
Method 1 Draw the line using the LINE command and then select it. While it is selected, click the
Centerline icon.

Method 2 Enable the Centerline icon and then draw the line, using the LINE command.

The Centerline icon is shown in Figure 14-3. A centerline will display as the centerline linetype.

Figure 14-3
Centerline Icon

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 14- 3

Revolving a Sketch Without using a Centerline

Step 1 Check the default project and if necessary, set it to Inventor Course.
Step 2 Using the NEW command, start a new part file using the template:
English-Modules Part (in).ipt.
Step 3 Save the file with the name: Inventor Workalong 14-1. (Figure Step 3A and 3B)

Figure Step 3A
3D Model

Author's Comments: In this and the next

workalong, you will be constructing the
same solid model. In this workalong
without the use of a centerline, and the
next workalong with the use of a
centerline. Either method is an
acceptable way of creating the solid
model. These two workalongs will allow
you to practice both methods.

Figure Step 3B
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Step 4 Start a new sketch on the Front or XZ Plane. Project the Center Point onto the sketch.

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

14- 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 5 Draw and dimension one-half of the Front view as shown in the figure. Ensure that the
sketch is fully constrained (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Author's Comments: Note how the sketch is a profile of the object, that when revolved, will create
the solid model. For now, ignore the center hole and the 4 small holes. The line located in the
center of the model is used as the axis. The holes will be inserting after the sketch is revolved to
complete the solid model.
Author's Comments: Your geometrical and dimensional constrains may not match the figure
exactly. Ensure that the sketch is fully constrained.

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 14- 5

Step 6 In Model mode, enter the REVOLVE command. It will highlight the sketch automatically as
the area to revolve. (Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6

Step 7 In the Revolve dialogue box, set the Extents to Full and enable the Axis icon. Select the line
on the right side of the sketch as the axis. The Full setting means that it will be revolved 360 degrees.
(Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

14- 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 8 After you select the axis, the REVOLVE command will display the Base model as it is
revolved. If this is the desired outcome, click OK. (Figure Step 8A and 8B)

Figure Step 8A

Figure Step 8B

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 14- 7

Step 9 Start a new sketch on the top plane of the model. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Step 10 Using what you learned in Module 12, draw a construction circle and four construction
lines. Insert a dimension for the diameter of the circle. Ensure that the sketch is fully constrained.
(Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Author's Comments: Ensure that you snap the lines correctly when you draw them. If you don't, you
will have trouble fully constraining the sketch. If you have trouble doing this step, look at the
workalong in Module12.

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

14- 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 11 Using the technique that you learned in Module 12, draw the 4 circles. Dimension one and
constrain the additional 3 with an Equal constraint. (Figure Step 11A and 11B)

Figure Step 11A

Author's Comments: Your

geometrical and dimensional
constrains may not match the figure
exactly. Ensure that your sketch is
fully constrained.

Figure Step 11B

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 14- 9

Step 12 Extrude the four circles to the To Next extents. (Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 12

Step 13 Start another sketch on the top plane

and draw a circle by offsetting the outside
diameter. Dimension the circle and extrude it to
complete the model. (Figure Step 13)
Author's Comments: Using an offset, will
automatically constrain the circle.

Figure Step 13

Step 14 Change the color to: Aluminum - Polished.

(Figure Step 14)

Step 15 Save and close the file. Figure Step 14

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

14- 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Revolving a Sketch using a Centerline

Step 1 Check the default project and if necessary, set it to Inventor Course.
Step 2 Enter the NEW command to start a new part file using the template:
English-Modules Part (in).ipt.
Step 3 Save the file with the name: Inventor Workalong 14-2. (Figure Step 3)

Figure Step 3
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 14- 11

Step 4 Start a new sketch on the Front or XZ Plane. Draw and dimension a line start it by
snapping to the Center Point. Draw it 5 inches in the negative Y direction. This is the length of
the model. This is centerline of the solid model. Change the line’s properties to a centerline.
(Figure Step 4A and 4B)

Figure Step 4B

Figure Step 4A

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

14- 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 5 Draw and dimension one-half of the Front view as shown in the figure.
(Figure Step 5A and 5B)

Figure Step 5A

Figure Step 5B

Author's Comments: Your geometrical and dimensional constrains may not match the figure
exactly. Just ensure that your sketch is fully constrained.

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 14- 13

Step 6 Return to Model mode and enter the REVOLVE command. Since a centerline is part of
the sketch, the REVOLVE command will automatically use it as the axis to revolve the sketch
around. It will display the outcome of the revolution. (Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6

Step 7 In a new sketch, add the four smaller circles and extrude them to complete the model.
Step 8 Change the color to: Aluminum - Polished. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Step 9 Save and close the file.

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

14- 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Drafting Lesson
Cross Sections

When a view of an object requires a clearer description of its

interior or it is hard to dimension because of the hidden lines,
a cross section view can be drawn in place of the normal
multiview. See Figure 32-1

Figure 32-1
Normal Front and Right
Side View of an Object

Figure 32-2
A Front view and Right
Side Section View

A cross section view, also called a section, is a view of the object

as if it were cut along a cutting plane and the two pieces pulled
apart exposing the inside of the object. See Figure 32-2 and 32-3.
A cutting plane line is the line along the object where the cut
would have been made. See Figure 32-2. The arrows point in the
Figure 32-3 direction that you are looking when drawing the section view. The
3D Model of the Object surfaces of the object that are solid, when cut, are crosshatched.
Showing it Cut on the
Cutting Plane Line

The Key Principles in Module 14

1 When drawing symmetrical objects, it is much easier to create the model by revolving the Base
sketch around an axis rather then extruding it. The axis, which can be one of the lines in the sketch
or a centerline, must always be located in the center of the symmetrical model.
2 A centerline is a line with its properties set to act as a centerline.

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 14- 15

Lab Exercise 14-1 Time Allowed: 60 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 14-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeter
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Copper - Polished Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the Base plane.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the Base sketch and revolve it create the Base
model of the object shown below. Revolve it by using a line in the sketch. Do not draw a
centerline. (Figure Step 2A and 2B)

Figure Step 2A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Step 3 Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints to fully constrain all
sketches.

Step 4 Apply the color shown above. (Figure Step 4A and 4B) Step 5
Add the four small holes on a new sketch and extrude them.

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

14- 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 2B
Suggested Base
Sketch - Right Side -
YZ Plane

Figure Step 4A
Completed Solid Model
- Home View

Figure Step 4B
Completed Model
- Rear View

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 14- 17

Author's Geometric Constrains: The following figures shows the sketch's construction method plus
geometric and dimensional constraints suggested by the author to help you learn how to construct
and constrain sketches. It is only the suggested method and if you can complete a fully
constrained sketch using a different construction method and constraints, that is what is important.
You may want to compare your construction method and constraints with the authors.
Author's Comments: Your geometrical and dimensional constrains may not match the figure
exactly. Just ensure that your sketch is fully constrained.

Base Sketch

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

 14- 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 14-2 Time Allowed: 60 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 14-2 Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt Color: Zinc Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the Base plane.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the Base sketch and revolve it create the Base
model of the object shown below. Revolve it by using a centerline. (Figure Step 2A, 2B, 2C,
2D, and 2E)

Figure Step 2A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Step 3 Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints to fully constrain all
sketches.
Step 4 Apply the color shown above. (Figure Step 4A and 4B)
Step 5 Add the four small holes and the key on new sketches and extrude them.

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 14- 19

Figure Step 2B
Suggested
Base Sketch -
YZ Plane

Figure Step 2C
Detail of Keyway

Figure Step 2D
Keyway is Flat Across the Top

Figure Step 2E
Solid Model - Home View

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

14- 20 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 4A
Completed Model -
Home View

Figure Step 4B
Completed Model
- Rotated View

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 14- 21

Author's Geometric Constrains: The following figures shows the sketch's construction method plus
geometric and dimensional constraints suggested by the author to help you learn how to construct
and constrain sketches. It is only the suggested method and if you can complete a fully
constrained sketch using a different construction method and constraints, that is what is important.
You may want to compare your construction method and constraints with the authors.
Author's Comments: Your geometrical and dimensional constrains may not match the figure
exactly. Just ensure that your sketch is fully constrained.

Base Sketch

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

14- 22 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Key Sketch

Revolving ©2004 - 2020 Module 14

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 15
Fillet and Chamfer Features

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:

1 Describe fillet and chamfer features.

2 Apply the FILLET and CHAMFER commands to create fillets and chamfers on solid models.

Fillets
A fillet is a tangent arc. A fillet is simply an arc which is tangent at both ends. It can be tangent to
two lines, a line and an arc, or two arcs. Technically, it is a fillet when material is added to the object
model and a round is when material is removed from the object. See Figure 15-1 and 15-2. Most
CAD systems, including Inventor, use the term fillet for both.
There are two basic methods of inserting fillets in Inventor. In this module, inserting the fillets after
the solid model is created will be taught. They are called features. In the Inventor Advanced eBook,
drawing fillets on the 2D sketch will be taught. It is always better to insert the fillets as features since
that makes them much easier to edit after the solid model is created.

Figure 15-1
Fillets Dimensioned in 2D

Figure 15-2
How Fillets Appear on the
Solid Model

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

15 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Geometry Lesson
Tangency - Part 1
A point of tangency is the theoretical point where a line joins an arc or where two arcs join each
other making a smooth transition. A line tangent to a circle passes the circle and touches it on
only one point on the circle. The point where they touch is called the point of tangency. See
Figure 15-3.

Figure 15-3
Tangency - Part 1

Inventor Command: FILLET

The FILLET command is used to insert a fillet feature on a solid model.
Shortcut: F

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 15-3

Creating Models With Fillet Features

Step 1 Check the default project and if
necessary, set it to Inventor Course.
Step 2 Enter the NEW command to start a new part file using
the template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt.
Step 3 Save the file with the name: Inventor Workalong 15-1.
(Figure Step 3A and 3B)

Figure Step 3A
3D Model

Figure Step 3B

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

15 - 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 4 Draw the Base sketch on the Front

view. Ensure that it is fully constrained.
Extrude the sketch to create the Base
model. (Figure Step 4A and 4B)

Figure Step 4B

Figure Step 4A

Step 5 Enter the FILLET

command and in the Fillet
dialogue box, click the radius to
edit it. Change the radius to
1.50. (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 15-5

Step 6 Click the Pencil icon to change to the Arrow icon. When the Plus icon appears beside the
cursor, select the top left corner of the model. (Figure Step 6A and 6B)

Figure Step 6A

Author's Comments: The Pencil icon

means edit and the Arrow icon means
selecting.
Figure Step 6B

Another reason that it is best to create fillets on the solid model rather than on
the sketch is that you can then insert them as the last feature to complete the
model. The reason that this is important is once the fillet is created the corners
are lost on the model. Without the corners, there is nothing to measure from
when placing geometry.

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

15 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Snap Symbols

Mode Icon How they appear in Inventor

Center N/A
(Snaps to the center point of
an arc or circle)

Step 7 Insert the same fillet on the opposite side of the

model. (Figure Step 7)

Step 8 Start a new sketch and enter the CENTER

POINT CIRCLE command. Right click the mouse. In the
Right-click menu, select Center. Select the arc and draw
a 1 inch Diam circle. Dimension and extrude it.
(Figure Step 8A, 8B, 8C, and 8D) Figure Step 7

Figure Step 8A

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 15-7

Figure Step 8B

Figure Step 8C

Figure Step 8D

A fillet is a tangent arc. A fillet is simply an arc that is tangent at both ends. It can
be tangent to two lines, a line and an arc, or two arcs but it must be tangent at both
ends. Technically, a fillet is when material is added to the object. It is called a round
when material is removed from the object.

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

15 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 9 Start a new sketch. On it, draw and dimension the slot and extrude it.
(Figure Step 9A and 9B)

Figure Step 9A

Figure Step 9B

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 15-9

Step 10 Using what you just learned, insert the 1 inch radius fillets. (Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Step 11 Insert the fillets as shown on the figures. Ensure that you set the correct radius for
each fillet. (Figure Step 11A and 11B)

Figure Step 11A

Figure Step 11B

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

15 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 12 Enter the FILLET command and in the Fillet dialogue box, set the Radius to 0.0875. Set
the Select mode to Loop and select the edge as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 12

Step 13 To complete the model, change the color to:

Chrome - Polished Black. (Figure Step 13)

Step 14 Save and close the file. Figure Step 13

Inventor allows two methods of inserting fillets and chamfers. The first method is
to create the solid model using extrude or revolution just as you have being
doing to this point in the course and then insert the fillets on the solid model.
The second method is drawing the fillets in the 2D sketch and they will be
created when the sketch is extruded or revolved. The first method is the BEST
method and should be used whenever possible. One reason that it is the best method is it allows
you to decide the order of filleting. This is especially important where two or more fillets meet or
intersect on the model. This is the method you will be using in this module.

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 15-11

Chamfers
A chamfer is similar to a fillet except instead of an arc being
inserted, it inserts an inclined line. See Figure 15-4. Figure
15-5 shows a multiview drawing with the chamfers
dimensioned.
There are two basic methods of inserting chamfers in
Inventor, the same as fillets. In this module, you will learn
how to insert them as features after the solid model is
created as shown in Figure 15-6.

Figure 15-4
Chamfers

Figure 15-5
Chamfers in a Multiview Drawing

Figure 15-6
Chamfers on the Solid Model

Inventor Command: CHAMFER

The CHAMFER command is used to create a chamfer feature on a solid model.
Shortcut: CTRL+ Shift+K

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

15 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Creating Models with Chamfer Features

Step 1 Open the file: Inventor Lab 13-1.ipt
that you created in Module 13.
Step 2 Using the SAVEAS command, save the file with the
name: Inventor Workalong 15-2. (Figure Step 2A and 2B)

Figure Step 2A

Figure Step 2B
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 15-13

Step 3 Enter the CHAMFER command. In the Chamfer dialogue box, ensure that the equal side
icon and Edges icon are enabled. Set the distance to 1.0. Select the bottom right corner of the
model. (Figure Step 3)

Figure Step 3

Step 4 Set the distance to 0.125 and insert the chamfer on the around the top as shown in the
figure. (Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 4

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

15 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 5 Using what you just learned, insert the fillet and chamfers on the model as shown in the
figure. (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Step 6 Insert the 0.10 chamfers around the outside as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 15-15

Step 7 The completed model should appear as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Step 8 Save and close the file.

Many commands can be used while you are activity using another command.
The ORBIT command is one of them. To increase your drawing speed, you can
preform an operation on one side of a model and then, while you are still in the
command, press F4 and rotate the model. Then preform the operation on
another side. This would have worked well for Step 11 as you could have placed the fillet on the
other side of the hole in the same FILLET command.

The Key Principles in Module 15

1 A fillet is a tangent arc. A fillet is simply an arc which is tangent at both ends. It can be
tangent to two lines, a line and an arc or two arcs.
2 A chamfer is similar to a fillet except instead of an arc being inserted, it creates an inclined line.
3 There are two basic methods of inserting fillets in Inventor. In this module, inserting the fillets
after the solid model is created will be taught. They are called features. In the Inventor Advanced
Modules, drawing fillets on the 2D sketch will be taught. It is always better to insert the fillets as
features since that makes them much easier to draw and edit after the solid model is created.

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

 15-16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 15-1 Time Allowed: 60 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 15-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: mm
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Steel - Galvanized Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the Base plane.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and extrude them to
produced the solid model shown in the figures. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and
dimensional constraints to fully constrain all sketches. (Figure Step 2A, 2B, and 2C)

Figure Step 2A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Step 3 Insert the fillets and chamfers as features after the model is constructed.
Step 4 Apply the color shown above.

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 15-17

Figure Step 2B
Suggested Base Sketch -
Front - XZ Plane

Figure Step 2C
3D Model - Home View

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

15 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author's Geometric Constrains: The following figures shows the construction method suggested by
the author to help you learn how to construct models. It is only the suggested method and if you
can complete a fully constrained sketch and complete the model, that is what is important. You may
want to compare your construction methods with the authors.

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 15-19

Lab Exercise 15-2 Time Allowed: 30 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 15-2 Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: N/A Color: Aluminum - Polished Material: N/A

Step 1 Open the file: Inventor Lab 14-2.ipt that you created in Module 14.
Step 2 Using the SAVEAS command, save it with the name: Inventor Lab 15-2.
Step 3 Add the fillets and chamfers as features as shown in the figures.
(Figure Step 3A, 3B, and 3C)

Figure Step 3A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

15 - 20 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 3B
Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 3C
Solid Model -
Rotated View

Fillet and Chamfer Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 15

 Inventor ® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 16
Competency Test No.3

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:

1 Within a two hour time limit, complete a written exam and a lab exercises.

Competency Tests
The Inventor eBook was written with competency based modules. What that means is that you
have not completed each module until you have mastered it. The Competency Test module
contains multiple choice questions and a comprehensive lab exercise to test your mastery of the set
of modules that you completed. There are no answers or keys supplied in a Competency Test
module since it is meant to be checked by your instructor. If there are any parts of this module that
you have trouble completing, you should go back and reread the module or modules containing the
information that you are having trouble with. If necessary, redo as many lab exercises required until
you fully understand the material.
If you are Completing this eBook Without the Aid of an Instructor
Complete the written test and the lab exercise.
If you are Completing this eBook in a Classroom with an Instructor
The instructor will give instructions on what to do after you have completed this module.

Competency Test No. 3 ©2004 - 2020 Module 16

1-2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Inventor
Competency Test No. 3
Open Book
Multiple Choice Questions
Select the BEST answer.
1 Which on of the following statements is true?
A) Construction objects are drawn with the command CONSTRUCTION.
B) Construction objects will not be used when the sketch is converted into a 3D feature.
C) Construction objects cannot be used to constrain the sketch.
D) Construction objects cannot be used as dimensional constraints.
E) Construction objects will be used when the sketch is converted into a 3D feature.

2 When is it best to place fillets and chamfers on a solid model?

A) The last thing you do to complete the solid.
B) The first thing after the base sketch it is revolved.
C) Before the base model is created.
D) When the sketches are being created.
E) The first thing after the base sketch is extruded.

3 Which snap mode is used to snap to the location where two object cross?
A) On
B) Midpoint
C) Intersection
D) Point
E) Center

4 Which one of the following function keys, when pressed, enables the display of the constraint
icons?.
A) F2
B) F4
C) F6
D) F8
E) F10

5 What two commands are used to create a solid model?

A) REVOLVE AND OFFSET
B) EXTRUDE and REVOLVE
C) EXTRUDE and FILLET
D) PROJECT and SOLID
E) EXTRUDE and MODEL

Competency Test No. 3 ©2004 - 2020 Module 16

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 1-3

6 Which key or keys, when pressed while you are selecting objects, will allow you to select
more then one object in the selection set?
A) Only TAB
B) Either ALT or SHIFT
C) Either CTRL or ALT
D) Either TAB or CTRL
E) Either CTRL or SHIFT.

7 What does the REVOLVE command do when it finds a centerline in the base sketch it is
revolving?
A) It automatically uses the centerline as the axis of revolution.
B) It prompts you to select the axis of revolution.
C) It extrudes the base sketch using it as the center.
D) It ignores the centerline.
E) It allows you to select another axis as the axis of revolution.

8 Which snap mode is used when you want to snap to the center of a line?
A) On
B) Midpoint
C) Intersection
D) Point
E) Center

9 Which geometrical constraint is used to make 4 circles all the same diameter when only one
of them is dimensioned?
A) Tangent
B) Concentric
C) Coincident
D) Center
E) Equal

10 What one of the following is used to change the properties of a selected object from a
drawing object to a construction object?
A) Construction menu
B) Construction icon
C) Construction line
D) Construction circle
E) Construction object

Competency Test No. 3 ©2004 - 2020 Module 16

 1-4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 16-1 Time Allowed: 60 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 16-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt Color: Chrome - Polished Blue Material: N/A

Step 1 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and revolve or extrude them to
produce the 3D model. (Figure Step 1)

Figure Step 1
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Step 2 Draw the base sketch on the Front view. (Figure Step 2)
Step 3 Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints to fully constrain all
sketches. Ensure that all objects, on all sketches, display purple on a black background.
Step 4 Create the fillets and chamfers after the solid model is totally constructed.

Competency Test No. 3 ©2004 - 2020 Module 16

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 1-5

Step 5 Apply the color shown. (Figure Step 5A, 5B, and 5C)

Figure Step 2
Suggested Base Sketch -
Front View (XZ Plane)

Figure Step 5A
Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 5B
Figure Step 5C
Solid Model - Rotated View
Solid Model - Rotated View

Competency Test No. 3 ©2004 - 2020 Module 16

 1-6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 16-2 Time Allowed: 60 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 16-2 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeters
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Silicon Nitrite - Polished Material: N/A

Step 1 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the base sketch on the Right Side view and revolve it to
create the base model. (Figure Step 1A, 1B, 1C, and 1D)

Figure Step 1A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Step 2 Draw the necessary sketches and extrude them to complete the model.
Step 3 Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints to fully constrain all
sketches. Ensure that all objects, on all sketches, display purple on a black background.
Step 4 Create the fillets after the solid model is totally constructed.

Competency Test No. 3 ©2004 - 2020 Module 16

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 1-7

Figure Step 1B Figure Step 1C

Suggested Base Keyway Detail Figure Step 1D
Sketch - Right Side
View (YZ Plane) Section Detail

Step 5 Apply the color shown. (Figure Step 5A and 5B)

Figure Step 5A
Solid Model - Home View
Figure Step 5B
Solid Model - Rotated View

Competency Test No. 3 ©2004 - 2020 Module 16

1-8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

Competency Test No. 3 ©2004 - 2020 Module 16

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 17
Angles

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Describe drawing inclined lines, aligned and angular dimensions, loops, trimming, and
extending.
2 Apply the GENERAL DIMENSIONS command to insert aligned and angular dimensions on a
sketch.
3 Apply the TRIM and EXTEND commands to trim and extend objects in a sketch.

Drafting Lesson
Auxiliary Views
When a model has an inclined side, its plane is not parallel to the horizontal and vertical sides of
the glass box. If the inclined view is drawn in one of the predefined views in a multiview drawing,
some or all parts of the object will not be their true size and shape. To correct this, an auxiliary
view is drawn instead of a predefined view. An auxiliary view is a view looking perpendicular to the
inclined plane as shown in Figure 17-1.

Figure 17-1
An Auxiliary View

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

17 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Drafting Lesson
Broken Views and Break Lines
To simplify or speed up drawing some of the views of a multiview drawing, some views are only
partially drawn. In these cases, the cutoff (sometimes called the broken) portion of the view is not
required for the reader to visualize the object. Auxiliary views are frequently cutoff. When a view is
cutoff, a break line is drawn to indicate where the view was broken as shown in Figure 17-2. A
short break line and a long break line are drawn differently as shown in Figure 17-2.

Short Break
Long Break
An Example of Using
Break Lines
Figure 17-2
Broken Views and Break Lines

Inventor Command: TRIM

The TRIM command is used to trim a portion of
an existing line or arc. The object to be trimmed
must intersect an existing object. If it does not
intersect an object, the complete object will be
deleted instead of being trimmed.
Shortcut: X

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 17-3

Inventor Command: EXTEND

The EXTEND command is used to extend the length
of an existing line or arc. If the object to be extended
does not intersect an object, EXTEND will find the
apparent intersection, if there is one.
Shortcut: none

Drawing and Dimensioning Inclined Lines

Drawing and dimensioning inclined lines in sketches is a simple operation in Inventor compared to
most CAD systems. The reason for this is that you can guess at the angle when drawing the inclined
line rather then entering the exact number of degrees. After the sketch is complete, the angle is
dimensioned using the exact angle and Inventor will adjust the sketch to match.
Aligned Dimensions
An aligned dimension is a dimension measuring the
true length of a line or the true distance between two
points. See Figure 17-3. The extension lines will be
perpendicular and the dimension line will be parallel to
the line or an imaginary line between two points.

Figure 17-3
An Aligned Dimension
Placing an Aligned Dimension

To place an aligned dimension, enter the GENERAL DIMENSION command or the shortcut D and
regardless if you are selecting a line, two points, or two lines to dimension, the same Aligned
dimension icon will display as shown in Figures 17-4 and Figure 17-5.

Figure 17-5
Aligned
Dimension
Figure 17-4 Icon
Placing a Aligned
Dimension

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

17 - 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Angular Dimensions
An angular dimension is a dimension measuring the angle between two
lines or the angle between the imaginary lines between three points. See
Figure 17-6. The lines cannot be parallel to each other.
Placing an Angular Dimension
To place an angular dimension, enter the GENERAL DIMENSION
command or the shortcut D and either select two lines or three points to Figure 17-6
place the angular dimension between. Angular Dimension
The Two-Line Method
Select the first line. It will change color. Move the cursor onto the second line and without
selecting it, note how it changes color. The Angular Dimension icon will display as shown in
Figure 17-7. Select the second line. Drag the dimension to locate it. See Figure 17-8

Figure 17-8
Figure 17-7 The Angular
Placing an Angular Dimension - Two line
Dimension - Two line Method
Method
The Three-Point Method
Select the first two points and move the cursor onto the third point as shown in Figure 17-9. The
second point MUST be the vertex of the angle. The Angular Dimension icon will display as shown in
Figure 17-9. Select the third point and drag the angular dimension to the desired location. See
Figure 17-10.

Figure 17-9 Figure 17-10

Placing an Angular The Angular
Dimension - Dimension - Three Point
Three Point Method Method

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 17-5

Geometrical Constraint Symbols

Constraint Symbol Icon Definition

Tangent Constrains two objects tangent to each other.

Drawing Models that Contain Inclined Lines

Figure Step 3A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

17 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 1 Check the default project and if necessary, set it to Inventor Course.
Step 2 Using the NEW command start a new part file using the template:
English-Modules Part (in).ipt.
Step 3 Save the file with the name: Inventor Workalong 17-1. (Figure Step 3A, 3B, and 3C)

Figure Step 3B
Auxiliary View

Figure Step 3C
3D Model
Home View

Step 4 Start the Base sketch on the Front or XZ plane.

Step 5 Project the Center Point onto the sketch.

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 17-7

Step 6 Draw the three top lines of the Front view and dimension them. Ensure that the sketch is fully
constrained. (Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6

Step 7 Enter the OFFSET command. When prompted, select the top line. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

17 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 8 Right click the mouse and in the Right-click menu, select Continue. Move the cursor down
about 0.5 inches. The offset line will drag with it. Click to select the location. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Step 9 Do the same for the other two lines. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 17-9

Step 10 Enter the TRIM command. When prompted, select the overlapping end of the lines on the
top intersection. (Figure Step 10A and 10B)

Figure Step 10A

Figure Step 10B

Step 11 Enter the EXTEND command and extend the lines at the bottom intersection by
selecting each of them. (Figure Step 11A and 11B)

Figure Step 11A Figure Step 11B

When inserting an angular dimension, only one

dimension can be placed at a time even though
there is a choice of placing the dimension in four
different locations and two different angles. The
figure on the right shows the four different angular dimension
locations and the two different angles that can be inserted.

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

17 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 12 Add three dimensions for the 0.5 thickness. The sketch should be fully constrained.
(Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 12

Step 13 Press F6 to return to Home view. Step

14 Extrude the sketch. (Figure Step 14)

Figure Step 14

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 17-11

Step 15 Start a new sketch on the top plane. Draw three lines and add the dimensions to fully
constrain the sketch. (Figure Step 15)

Figure Step 15

Step 16 Extrude the sketch using the cut option. (Figure Step 16)

Figure Step 16

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

17 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 17 Start a new sketch on the inclined plane. Draw three construction lines and dimension
them to locate the center of the circles. Ensure that the lines are fully constrained. (Figure Step
17)

Figure Step 17

Author's Comments: Draw the vertical line from the midpoint of the top edge to the midpoint of the
bottom edge. That way it will not have to be dimensioned. Draw the horizontal lines perpendicular
to the vertical line or one of the edges and snap onto the edge lines.

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 17-13

Step 18 Insert two circles locating their centers at the intersection of the construction lines.
Dimension only one of them and then apply the Equal constrain to the other circle.
(Figure Step 18)

Figure Step 18

Step 19 Draw a line from one circle to the

other. Don't worry about constraining them
tangent at this time. Ensure that the Snap
On icon appears when you select the
endpoint of the lines. (Figure 19A and 19B)

Figure
Step 19A

Figure Step 19B

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

17 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 20 In the right-click menu, select Create Constrain - Tangent. (Figure Step 20).

Figure Step 20

Step 21 Apply the Tangent constraint between the circle and the line. Repeat with the other
circle. (Figure Step 21A and 21B)

Figure Step 21A

Figure Step 21B

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 17-15

Step 22 Trim the circles. This will take four steps. (Figure Step 22)

Figure Step 22

Step 23 Extrude the sketch. (Figure Step 23)

Figure Step 23

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

17 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 24 Draw a 2D
Sketch on the bottom
plane. Using what you
just learned, ensure
that you constrain the
lines tangent to the
circles and then trim.
(Figure Step 24A and
24B)

Figure Step 24A

Figure Step 24B

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 17-17

Step 25 Extrude the sketch. (Figure Step 25)

Figure Step 25

Step 26 Insert the fillets and change to the color: Orange to complete the solid model.
(Figure Step 26)

Figure Step 26

Step 27 Save and close the part file.

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

17 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

When inserting an
aligned dimension and
the Linear dimension
icon displays, as
shown in the figure immediate right,
rather then the Aligned dimension icon,
you can change that and force Inventor
to place an aligned dimension. Right-click the mouse while the icon is
displayed. In the Right-click menu, select Aligned as shown in the figure
far right. This will also work in reverse. If the Aligned dimension icon
displays, you can instruct Inventor to place a linear dimension either
horizontal or vertical.

The TRIM command can be used to completely delete

an object rather then just trimming it. If the object to be
deleted does not intersect another object, simply press
X and select the object to be deleted. If it intersects
another object, it will take you more picks to delete it, but, it is still possible.
The reason that it is best to use the TRIM command rather then the
DELETE command to delete objects is the fact that TRIM has a shortcut
(X) while the DELETE command does not have a shortcut. Entering a
shortcut on the keyboard is faster then clicking an icon.

When offsetting most objects, the offset object can be

geometrically constrained to the existing object. If the
angle of the object that was offset is modified or the
object is moved, the object that was offset will maintain
its position in relation to the offset object. In the Right-click menu,
during the OFFSET command, the Constrain Offset can be enabled or
disabled as required. See the figure on the right.

The Key Principles in Module 17

1 You can guess at the angle when drawing inclined lines rather then entering the exact number
of degrees. After the sketch is complete, the angles are dimensioned using the exact angle and
Inventor will adjust the sketch to match.
2 The TRIM command is used to trim a portion of an existing line or arc. The object to be
trimmed must intersect an existing object. If it does not intersect an object, the complete object
will be deleted instead of being trimmed.
3 The EXTEND command is used to extend the length of an existing line or arc.

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 17-19

Lab Exercise 17-1 Time Allowed: 60 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 17-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeters
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Beige Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the base plane.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and extrude or revolve them to
produce the solid model shown below. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional
constraints to maintain the objects shape and size. (Figure Step 2A and 2B)

Figure Step 2A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

17 - 20 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 3 Apply the color shown above. (Figure Step 3)

Step 4 Create all fillets after the solid model is totally constructed.

Figure Step 2B
Suggested Base
Sketch - Front (XZ)
Plane

Figure Step 3
Completed Solid Model
Home View

Author's Base Sketch

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 17-21

Lab Exercise 17-2 Time Allowed: 60 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 17-2 Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt Color: Nickle Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the base plane.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and extrude or revolve them to
produce the solid model shown below. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional
constraints to maintain the objects shape and size. (Figure Step 2A and 2B)

Figure Step 2A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

17 - 22 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 3 Apply the color shown above. (Figure Step 3)

Step 4 Create all fillets after the solid model is totally
constructed.

Figure Step 2B
Suggested Base Sketch -
Top (XY) Plane)

Figure Step 3
Completed Solid Model - Home View

Author's Base Sketch

Angles ©2004 - 2020 Module 17

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 18
Editing Geometry

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Describe how to select objects using windows and crossing windows.
2 Describe and apply the THREE POINT ARC, TWO POINT RECTANGLE, and COPY
commands.

Methods of Selecting Objects

Method Description Window Display Selected Object Display

pick Selects one object at a time

using the graphic cursor. To
pick more then one object at a
time to create a selection set,
hold down the SHIFT or CTRL
keys while selecting the objects.
Selected objects will change
color.

window Selects all the objects that are

totally inside a window defined
by two user picks. A window will
always appear as a solid line
and is created by picking the first
point on the left and moving right
to pick the second point.

cross Selects all the objects that are

totally inside and the ones that
cross a window defined by two
user picks. A crossing window
will always appear as a dashed
line and is created by picking the
first point on the right and
moving left to select the second
point.

Figure 18-1
Methods of Selecting Objects

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

18 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Selecting Objects
Up to this point in the eBook, the only way that has been shown how to select objects was to pick
them, one at a time. A quicker and more efficient method of selecting multiple objects is to use
either a window or a crossing window. Study Figure 18-1 and start using windows and crossing
windows when selecting multiple objects in both Sketch or Model mode.

Inventor Command: THREE POINT ARC

The THREE POINT ARC command is used to draw an arc by selecting the two endpoints of the
arc and a third point anywhere on the circumference of the arc.
Shortcut: none

Author's Comments: Construct the arc either clockwise or counterclockwise. Point 3 MUST
always be on the circumference of the arc, between Point 1 and Point 2. See Figure 18-2.

Figure 18-2
Construction Techniques for Arcs

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 18-3

Inventor Command: TWO POINT RECTANGLE

The TWO POINT RECTANGLE command is used to draw a rectangle or a square by selecting
two points of its opposite corners.
Shortcut: none

Inventor Command: COPY

The COPY command is used in Sketch mode to copy 2D geometry from one XY location to
another.
Shortcut: none

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

18 - 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Drawing a Solid Model with Arcs and Rectangles

Step 1 Check the current project and if necessary, set it to Inventor Course.
Step 2 Using the NEW command, start a new part file using the template:
English-Modules Part (in).ipt.
Step 3 Save the file with the name: Inventor Workalong 18-1. (Figure Step 3A, 3B, 3C, and 3D)

Figure Step 3A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 18-5

Figure Step 3B
Dimensioned Detail Drawing

Figure Step 3C
3D Model - Home View

Figure Step 3D
3D Model - Rotated View

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

18 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 4 Start the Base sketch on the Front or XZ plane. Project the Center Point onto the
sketch.
Step 5 Draw the four outside lines of the Base sketch. (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Step 6 Offset all four lines as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 18-7

Step 7 Trim and dimension the sketch ensuring that it is totally constrained. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Step 8 Press F6 to change the view to the Home view. All of the lines in the sketch should
appear purple. Extrude the sketch. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

18 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Sketching Without the Grid

Up to this point in the Inventor eBook, the grid display has been enabled in Sketch mode. To the
more experienced operator, grid display can be disabled in Sketch mode. On some sketches, it is
sometimes easier to draw without the grid getting in the way.

Step 9 Start a new sketch on the right side face as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Step 10 Using what you already learned, open the Application Options dialogue box.
Step 11 Enable the Sketch tab.
Step 12 In the Display area, disable Grid Lines. (Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 12

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 18-9

Author's Comments: Disabling the grid display in a sketch can help when drawing some
sketches.
Step 13 Draw a construction line 0.5 inches
below the top edge and dimension it. Ensure
that it is fully constrained. (Figure Step 13)

Figure Step 13
Author's Comments: Do not offset an edge. Draw the line, using the LINE command, constrain it
perpendicular to one of the edges.
Step 14 Click the THREE POINT ARC command. Snap the first point to one end of the
construction line, snap the second point to the other end of the construction line. For the third
point, snap it to the midpoint of the top edge. (Figure Step 14A, 14B, and 14C)

Figure Step 14A

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

18 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 14B

Figure Step 14C

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 18-11

Step 15 Using the CREATE CONSTRAIN command, apply the Tangent constraint to the arc
and the top edge. This should fully constrain the sketch. (Figure Step 15)

Figure Step 15

Step 16 Extrude the sketch. (Figure Step 16A and 16B)

Figure Step 16A

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

18 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 16B

Step 17 Using what you just learned, start a new sketch on the top of the model. On it, draw three
construction lines and a three point arc. Ensure that the sketch is fully constrained. Extrude the
sketch. (Figure Step 17A and 17B)

Figure Step 17B

Figure 17A

Step 18 Start a new sketch on the lower plane.

(Figure Step 18)

Author's Comments: I have shown the new sketch with the grid
displayed only to help you visualize what plane the sketch is on. Figure Step 18

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 18-13

Step 19 On the sketch, using the TWO POINT RECTANGLE command, draw a rectangle by
selecting two opposite corners. Guess at the location and size. (Figure Step 19)

Figure Step 19

Step 20 Insert four dimensions, one from each edge. Check to ensure that the sketch is fully
constrained and extrude it. (Figure Step 20A and 20B)

Figure Step 20A

Figure Step 20B

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

18 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 21 Start a new sketch on the back plane and place a construction line as shown in the figure.
Do not offset the edge. Ensure that you constrain the line perpendicular to the bottom or top edge.
You can guess at the start point and the length of the line. (Figure Step 21)

Figure Step 21

Step 22 Change the property of the line to a construction line.

Insert one circle at the each end of the line. Snap to the end of
the line to locate the center of the circles. (Figure Step 22)

Figure Step 22

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 18-15

Step 23 Using what you learned already, dimension one of the circles and then create an Equal
constraint for the other one. Draw lines on either side of the circle. Ensure that you snap the end of
the lines onto the circles. Constrain the lines to the circle with the Tangent constraint. Trim the circles.
(Figure Step 23A, 23B, and 23C)

Figure Step 23A

Figure Step 23B
Figure Step 23C

Step 24 Draw a construction line from the end of the construction line at the top circle,
constraining it perpendicular to one of the vertical lines. Draw it approximately 1 inch long.
(Figure Step 24)

Figure Step 24

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

18 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 25 Click the COPY command and select the two lines and the arcs as shown in the figure.
Ensure that the Select icon is enabled. (Figure Step 25)

Figure Step 25

Step 26 Enable the From icon and select the end of the construction line for the From location.
(Figure Step 26)

Figure Step 26

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 18-17

Step 27 Enable the To icon and select the other end of the construction line for the To location.
(Figure Step 27)

Figure Step 27

Step 28 If you get the warning message, click Yes.

Step 29 Dimension the sketch until it is fully

constrained. (Figure Step 29)

Figure Step 29

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

18 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 30 Return to Model mode and extrude the slots. Extrude them 0.25 inches deep.
(Figure Step 30)

Figure Step 30

Step 31 Start a new sketch on the bottom of the extruded slots. Enter the OFFSET command and
right-click one of the arcs. In the Right-click menu, enable Loop Select. Select the other arc and
the lines to complete the loop. (Figure Step 31A and 31B)

Figure Step 31A Figure Step 31B

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 18-19

Step 32 Offset the slot towards the inside. Guess at the offset distance.
(Figure Step 32)

Step 33 Dimension the offset. (Figure Step 33)

Figure Step 32

Figure Step 33

Step 34 Extrude the slot To Next.

(Figure Step 34)

Figure Step 34

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 18-20 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 35 Redo Step 31 to 34 on the other slot to complete the

solid model.
Step 36 Set the color to: Dark Red. (Figure Step 36)

Step 37 Save and close the file. Figure Step 36

A window selects all of the objects that are totally inside of it defined by two user
picks. A window always appears as a solid line and is created by picking the first
point on the left and moving right to pick the second point.
A crossing window selects all of the objects that are totally inside and the ones that cross it
defined by two user picks. A crossing Window always appear as dashed lines and is created by
picking the first point on the right and moving left to select the second point.
To select a window or crossing window, select the first point by moving the cursor to the desired
location and press the left mouse button down. While holding it down, move to the cursor to
second desired location and release the mouse button.

A Window A Crossing Window

The Key Principles in Module 18

1 A window appears as a solid rectangle selecting only the objects totally inside the window. A
crossing window appears as a dashed rectangle selecting all of the objects that it crosses and the
ones that are totally inside the crossing window.

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 18-21

Lab Exercise 18-1 Time Allowed: 60 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 18-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeters
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Zinc Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the base plane.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and extrude or revolve them to
produce the solid model shown below. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional
constraints to maintain the objects shape and size. (Figure Step 2A, 2B, 2C, and 2D)
Step 3 Apply the color shown above. (Figure Step 3A and 3B)

Figure Step 2A
3D Model - Home View

Figure Step 3B
Solid Model - Rotated View

Figure Step 3A
Solid Model - Home View

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

18 - 22 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 2B
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 18-23

Figure Step 2C
Dimensioned Auxiliary View

Figure Step 2D
Suggested Base Sketch -
Front (XZ) Plane

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 18-24 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 18-2 Time Allowed: 60 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 18-2 Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt Color: Galvanized (texture) Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the base plane.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary

sketches and extrude or revolve them to produce the solid
model shown below. Apply all of the necessary geometrical
and dimensional constraints to maintain the objects shape
and size. (Figure Step 2A and 2B)
Step 3 Apply the color shown above.
(Figure Step 3A and 3B)
Step 4 Create all fillets after the solid model is totally
constructed.

Figure Step 3A
Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 2A
Suggested Base
Sketch - Right Side
(YZ Plane)
Figure Step 3B
Solid Model - Rotated View

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 18-25

Figure Step 2B
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

18 - 26 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author`s Base Sketch

Author's Base Model

Editing Geometry ©2004 - 2020 Module 18

 Inventor ® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 19
Work Features

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Describe and apply the POLYGON, TANGENT CIRCLE, and THREAD commands.
2 Describe work features including Work Points, Work Axes, and Work Planes and explain how
they are used in model construction.
3 Describe and apply the WORK POINT, WORK AXIS, and WORK PLANE commands.

Geometry Lesson
Regular Polygons
A polygon is defined as any plane figure bounded by straight lines. A regular polygon is a polygon
that has equal angles, equal sides and can be inscribed in or circumscribed around a circle. See
page 19-2. The first eight regular polygons are shown in Figure 19-1.

Figure 19-1
Regular Polygons

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Any regular polygon can be inscribed in or circumscribed around a circle as shown, using a
hexagon, in Figure 19-2.

Figure 19-2
Inscribed and Circumscribed Regular Polygon

It is important to understand and know the geometry involved to construct a triangle, square,
hexagon, and octagon as shown in Figure 19-3. Study each one and try to understand how they
are constructed and the angles used to construct them.

Figure 19-3
Geometry of Four Regular Polygons

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-3

Inventor Command: POLYGON

The POLYGON command is used to draw a regular polygon on a 2D sketch. You can select the
number of sides and choose between either an inscribed or a circumscribed polygon.
Shortcut: none

Inventor Command: TANGENT CIRCLE

The TANGENT CIRCLE command is used to draw a circle tangent to three lines.
Shortcut: none

Inventor Command: AUTO DIMENSION

The AUTO DIMENSION command is used to add dimensions or constrains automatically to fully
constrain a sketch.
Shortcut: none

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Drawing Threads
The THREAD command is used to draw exterior threads or interior threads on a 3D solid model.
See Figure 19-4 The threads created using the THREAD command are not actual threads
constructed on the model. They are simply a graphical representation of the threads. A real life
solid model created from the Inventor part would not be threaded. Actual threads can be created
but this is a much more advanced feature that is taught in the Inventor Advanced eBook. The
thread specifications can be applied to the thread in the sketch and then be used when creating
the working drawing of the part.

Figure 19-4
External and Internal Threads

Inventor Command: THREAD

The THREAD command is used to draw a graphical representation of an outside or inside
diameter thread. The thread specifications can also added to the thread properties.
Shortcut: none

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-5

Drawing Polygons and Threads - Part 1

Step 1 Using the NEW command start a new part file using the template:
English-Modules Part (in).ipt.
Step 2 Save the file with the name: Inventor Workalong 19-1. (Figure Step 2A, 2B, and 2C)

Figure Step 2A
3D Model -
Home View

Figure Step 2B
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Figure Step 2C
Detail

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 3 Draw the Base sketch on the Top or XY plane.

Step 4 Project the Center Point onto the Base sketch.
Step 5 Enter the POLYGON command and set the number of sides to 6. (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Step 6 Enable the Circumscribed Polygon icon. Snap to the Center Point for the
center and select a radius of approximately 0.75 inches. (Figure Step 6)
Figure Author's Comments: A circumscribed polygon is used in this sketch because the
Step 6 edge to edge dimension was given rather then corner to corner.

Step 7 Add the dimension from the Center Point to the left line. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-7

Step 8 Enter the AUTO DIMENSION command. Note that one dimension or constraint is
required to fully constrain the sketch. Click Apply. (Figure Step 8A, 8B, and 8C)

Figure Step 8A

Author's Comments: This will add a constraint to fully constrain the sketch. The AUTO
DIMENSION command is used to automatically add the dimensions or constraints to fully
constrain it.

Figure Step 8B Figure Step 8C

Step 9 Extrude the hexagon in the negative Z direction. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 10 Start a new sketch on the bottom side of the Base model. Enter the TANGENT
CIRCLE command. When prompted, select any three edges. (Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Author's Comments: Since you are inserting a circle tangent inside of a regular polygon, any
three edges can be selected.
Step 11 Extrude the circle 0.016 inches. Ensure that you enable the Join icon and extrude it
away from the bolt head. (Figure Step 11)

Figure Step 11

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-9

Step 12 Start a new sketch on the extruded circle. Draw and dimension a 1 inch circle using the
center of the circle to snap to. Extrude the circle 3 inches. (Figure Step 12A and 12B)

Figure Step 12A

Figure Step 12B

Step 13 Using the CHAMFER command, chamfer the bottom of the bolt. (Figure Step 13)

Figure Step 13

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 14 Enter the THREAD command. Enable the Location tab and set the Length to 1.5 and then
select the cylinder as the face to thread. Do not close the dialogue box. (Figure Step 14)

Figure Step 14

Step 15 Enable the Specification tab. Set the thread specifications as shown in the figure.
Click OK to execute the command. (Figure Step 15A and 15B)

Figure Step 15A

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-11

Figure Step15B

Step 16 Change the view to the Home view and change the
color to: Metal-Brass. (Figure Step 16)

Figure Step 16

Step 17 Save and close the file.

The threads created by the THREAD command are not actual threads constructed
on the model. They are simply a graphical representation of the threads. A real life
solid model created from the Inventor part file would not be threaded.

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Drawing Polygons and Threads - Part 2

Step 1 Check the default project and if necessary, set it to Inventor Course.
Step 2 Using the NEW command start a new part file using the template:
English-Modules Part (in).ipt.
Step 3 Save the file with the name: Inventor Workalong 19-2.

Step 4 Using what you learned in the last

workalong, construct the nut shown in
the multiview drawing. (Figure Step 4A
and 4B)

Figure Step 4B 3D
Model - Home View

Step 5 Change the color to:

Metal-Brass. (Figure Step 5A and 5B)

Figure Step 4A
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Figure Step 5A

Figure Step 5B

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-13

Work Features
Work Features consists of points, axes, and planes that can be inserted on a solid model or in
Model space. They are used as a construction aids to draw the model. You can insert them
when existing geometry cannot be used to add geometry. The three work features available in
Inventor are the work point, the work axis, and the work plane. See Figure 19-5.
This module is an introduction to work features only and will teach the user how to create and use
them in part modeling. They are also used in assemblies.
Work Points
A Work Point is a parametric construction point or a single XYZ location that is inserted and then
used as a work feature.
Once a Work Point is inserted on the model, it can be projected onto part faces, linear edges, or
onto an arc or circle using the PROJECT GEOMETRY command. Work Points can also be
constrained to the center points of arcs, circles, and ellipses. In this module, inserting Work Points
on the model or in 3D space will be taught.
Work Axes
A Work Axis is a parametric construction line or two XYZ locations joined by a line that is inserted
and then used as a work feature. Even though a Work Axis appears as a specified length, as far as
Inventor is concerned, it is infinite in length and can be expanded to any length required.
Use Work Axes when creating models to mark symmetry lines, center lines, or distances between
revolved feature axes. Work Axes can be used along the symmetry lines of circular features such as
cylinders, shafts, or holes. They can also be created as a work axis on a linear edge, a sketch line,
or a 3D sketch line.
Work Planes
A Work Plane is parametric construction plane or four XYZ locations joined by lines inserted on
the model or in model space and then used as a work feature. Even though a Work Plane
appears as a rectangular plane of a given size, it is actually infinite in size and can be expanded
to any size required.
Work Planes can be placed at any orientation in
space, offset from existing faces, or rotated
around an axis or edge. A work plane can be
used as a sketch plane and dimensioned or
constrained to other features or components.
Each work plane has its own internal coordinate
system. The order in which geometry is selected
determines the origin and positive directions of
the coordinate system axes.

Figure 19-5
Work Features

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Inventor Command: WORK POINT

The WORK POINT command is used to insert a W
Work Point on the model or in Model space.
Shortcut: . (period)

Inventor Command: WORK AXIS

The WORK AXIS command is used to insert a Work Axis on the model or in Model space.
Shortcut: / (forward slash)

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-15

Inventor Command: WORK PLANE

The WORK PLANE command is used to insert a Work Plane on the model or in Model space.
Shortcut: ] (right bracket)

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Creating Work Features

Step 1 Check the default project and if necessary, set it to Inventor Course.
Step 2 Using the NEW command start a new part file using the template:
English-Modules Part (in).ipt.
Step 3 Save the file with the name: Inventor Workalong 19-3.
Step 4 Create the solid model shown in the figures.
(Figure Step 4A and 4B)

Figure Step 4A
3D Model - Home View

Figure Step 4B
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-17

Step 5 Insert a Work Point at the apparent intersection of two edges. Click the WORK POINT
command and then Intersection of Two Lines. Select the edges shown in the figure. Note how they
highlight and extend. (Figure Step 5A, 5B, and 5C)

Figure Step 5A

Figure Step 5B

Figure Step 5C

Author's Comments: The Work Point will be inserted at the apparent intersection of the two
selected edges.

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 6 Insert a Work Point at the intersection of three planes. Click the WORK POINT
command and then Intersection of Three Planes. Select the planes shown in the figures.
(Figure Step 6A, 6B, 6C, 6D, and 6E)

Figure Step 6A
Figure Step 6B

Figure Step 6C

Figure Step 6D

Figure Step 6E

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-19

Step 7 To insert a Work Point at the midpoint of an edge.

Click the WORK POINT command and then On Vertex,
Sketch point, or Midpoint. Snap to the midpoint of the edge
shown in the figure. The midpoint will highlight with a yellow
work point symbol. Select it when it appears. (Figure Step
7A, 7B, and 7C)

Figure Step 7A

Figure Step 7B

Author's Comments: You should now have Figure Step 7C

three Work Points inserted.

Step 8 Work Features will display as items in the Browser bar.

Note the three Work Points that you just inserted. The visibility of
Work Features can be enabled or disabled in the Right-click
menu. (Figure 8A and 8B)

Figure Step 8A

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 20 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 9 Insert a Work Axis on the centerline of the cylinder. Enter the
WORK AXIS command and then Through Center of Circular or
Elliptical Edge. Select the cylinder as shown in the figure. Note how
the cylinder highlights. The axis will appear as a colored line.
(Figure Step 9A, 9B, and 9C)

Figure Step 8B

Figure Step 9A

Figure Step 9C
Figure Step 9B

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-21

Step 10 Insert a Work Axis between two Work Points. Enter the WORK AXIS command and then
Through Two Points. Select the Work Points on the front edge and the back corner. (Figure
Step 10A, 10B, 10C, and 10D)

Figure Step 10A

Figure Step 10B

Figure Step 10C

Figure Step 10D

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 22 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 11 Insert a Work Axis at the intersection of two non-parallel faces. Enter the WORK AXIS
command and then Intersection of Two Planes. Select the face on the left side and then the face
on the right side. The Work Axis will appear at the apparent intersection of the two faces. (Figure
Step 11A, 11B, 11C, and 11D)

Figure Step 11B

Figure Step 11A

Figure Step 11C

Figure Step 11D

Step 12 Work Features will display as items in the Browser bar.

Note the three Work Axes that you just inserted. (Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 12

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-23

Step 13 Insert a Work Plane from an existing face and through a Work Axis at a specified angle.
Enter the WORK PLANE command and then Plane. Select the face on the right side of the
model and then select the Work Axis at the center of the cylinder. Enter the angle between the
new Work Plane and the face. In this case, 90 degrees or perpendicular. (Figure Step 13A, 13B,
13C, and 13D)

Figure Step 13A

Figure Step 13B

Figure Step 13C

Figure Step 13D

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 24 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 14 Insert an offset Work Plane. Enter the WORK PLANE command and then Offset from
Plane. Select the face on the right side. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the plane into
the model. The Offset dialogue box will display. Enter the offset distance of -1.25 inches. (Figure
Step 14A, 14B, and 14C)
Author's Comments: The offset is negative since that is the
negative Z direction of the work plane.

Figure Step 14A

Author's Comments: The offset method is the most

commonly used to insert a Work Plane.

Figure Step 14B

Figure Step 14C

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-25

Step 15 Move the cursor to the edge of the newly inserted work plane and when the double arrow
icon appears, press and hold down the left mouse button. While holding it down, drag it to enlarge
the plane. Do this for all four corners. (Figure Step 15A and 15B)
Author's Comments: To get the double arrow to appear, you sometimes have to move the
cursor to the corner and click the mouse.

Figure Step 15A

Figure Step 15B

Author's Comments: Work axes and work planes can be expanded to any size you require.

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 26 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 16 Insert a Work Plane on a work axis and at an angle to an existing plane. Enter the WORK
PLANE command and then Plane. Select the Work Axis shown in the figure. Select the bottom
plane next and enter the angle of 90 degrees. (Figure Step 16A, 16B, 16C, 16D, and 16E)

Figure Step 16A

Figure Step 16A

Figure Step 16B

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-27

Figure Step 16D

Figure Step 16E

Step 17 The Browser bar should now appear as shown in the

figure. (Figure Step 17)

Figure Step 17

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 28 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 18 Disable the visibility of all Work Features. Your solid model should appear as shown in the
figure. (Figure Step 18)

Author's Comments: You will now be using the

drawings shown in Figures 19-6 and 19-7 and
inserting Work Features to add the detail on
the model.

Figure Step 18

Figure 19-7
3D Model - Home View

Figure 19-6
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-29

Step 19 Using the offset method, insert a Work Plane -2.25 inches from the right side face.
Expand the size of the Work Plane. Start a new sketch on the Work Plane.
(Figure Step 19A and 19B)

Figure Step 19A

Figure Step 19B

Step 20 Enter the TWO POINT RECTANGLE command and right

click the mouse. Ensure that AutoProject is enabled. Draw a
rectangle by snapping to the bottom right corner. Dimension the
square and ensure it is fully constrained. Extrude the sketch. (Figure
Step 20A, 20B, 20C, and 20D)

Figure Step 20A

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 30 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 20B

Figure Step 20C

Figure Step 20D

Step 21 Start a new sketch and draw two lines.

Dimension and extrude it.
(Figure Step 21A and 21B)

Figure Step 21A

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-31

Step 22 Insert a Work Plane -0.375 inches in from

the front face. (Figure Step 22)

Figure Step 21B

Step 23 Draw a triangle and

insert two dimensions to fully
constrain it. (Figure Step 23)

Figure Step 22

Figure Step 23

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 32 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 24 Extrude the sketch 0.125 inches in both directions to complete the part.
(Figure Step 24)

Figure Step 24

Author's Comments: I placed the sketch at the center of the rib so I extruded it one-half its width in
both directions.
Step 25 Disable the visibility of all Work Features. The completed solid model should appear as
shown in the figure. (Figure Step 25)

Figure Step 25

Author's Comments: As you can see there are may ways to insert and use Work Features.
Practice inserting them as you construct future models. Read Inventor's Help files if you have
trouble.

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-33

Step 26 Change to the Home view. (Figure Step 26)

Figure Step 26
Step 27 Save and close the part.

The Key Principles in Module 19

1 The POLYGON command is used to draw a regular polygon on a 2D sketch. You can select
the number of sides and choose between either an inscribed or a circumscribed polygon.
2 The threads created by the THREAD command are not actual threads constructed on the
model. They are simply a graphical representation of the threads.
3 The TANGENT CIRCLE command is used to draw a circle tangent to three lines.
4 The AUTO DIMENSION command is used to add dimensions or constrains automatically to
fully constrain a sketch.
5 The three Work Features available in Inventor are the Work Point, the Work Axis, and the
Work Plane.
6 A Work Point is a parametric construction point or a single XYZ location that is inserted and
then used as a Work Feature.
7 A Work Axis is a parametric construction line or two XYZ locations joined by a line that is
inserted and then used as a Work Feature.
8 A Work Plane is parametric construction plane or four XYZ locations joined by lines inserted
on the model or Model space and then used as a Work Feature.

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 19-34 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 19-1 Time Allowed: 90 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 19-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeters
Template: Metric - Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Chrome - Black Polished Material: N/A

Step 1 Draw the Base sketch on the Front view.

Step 2 Project the Center Point onto the Base plane.

Step 3 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and EXTRUDE them to
produce the solid model shown below. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional
constraints to maintain the objects shape and size. (Figure Step 3A, 3B, 3C, 3D, and 3E)
Step 4 Create the fillets and chamfers after the model is totally constructed.
Step 5 Apply the color shown above.

Figure Step 3A Figure Step 3B

3D Model - Orbited View 3D Model - Home View

Figure Step 3C Figure Step 3D

Solid Model - Home View 3D Model - Orbited View

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-35

Figure Step 1E
Left Side View - Multiview Drawing

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 36 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 1F
Right Side View - Multiview Drawing

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-37

Lab Exercise 19-2 Time Allowed: 90 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 19-2 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeters
Template: Metric - Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Chrome - Black Polished Material: N/A

Step 1 Draw the Base sketch on the Right Side view.

Step 2 Project the Center Point onto the Base plane.

Step 3 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the same model you just drew in Lab Exercise 19-1. In
this exercise, REVOLVE the Base sketch and then add sketches and extrude them to complete the
model. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints to maintain the objects
shape and size. (Figure Step 3A, 3B, 3C, and 3D)
Step 4 Create the fillets and chamfers after the model is totally constructed.
Step 5 Apply the color shown above.

Figure Step 3B
Figure Step 3A
3D Model - Home View
3D Model - Orbited View

Figure Step 3C Figure Step 3D

Solid Model - Home View Solid Model - Orbited View

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 38 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author's Base Sketch

Author's Base Model

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-39

Lab Exercise 19-3 Time Allowed: 90 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 19-3 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeters
Template: Metric - Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Galvanized (texture) Material: N/A

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the Base sketch.

Step 2 Draw the necessary sketches and extrude or revolve them to produce the solid model
shown below. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints to maintain the
objects shape and size. (Figure Step 2A, 2B, 2C, 2D, and 2E)
Step 3 Create the fillets and chamfers after the model is totally
constructed.
Step 4 Apply the color shown above.

Figure Step 2A
3D Model - Home View

Figure Step 2B

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 40 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 2C
Suggested Base Sketch - Author's Base Model Top (XY) Plane

Author's Base Sketch

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 19-41

Figure Step 2D
Solid Model - Home View
With Work Planes

Figure Step 2E
Solid Model - Home View

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

19 - 42 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

Work Features ©2004 - 2020 Module 19

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 20
Modifying Solid Models

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Describe how to edit the dimensions and part features of an existing solid model using the
Browser bar to aid you.
2 Describe how to hide and/or suppress features in the solid model.
3 Describe and apply the MEASURE command to measure lengths, loops, angles, or areas of a
solid model in either two dimensions or three dimensions.
4 Describe how to set the material and change the color of faces of the solid model.
5 Describe how to obtain the physical properties of a solid model.

Modifying Solid Models

The ability to modify solid models is as important to the drafter/designer as being able to construct
models. Since most parts are modified after the initial design or revised and used in another project,
it is very important that you can modify solid models rather then redraw them. The true power of
Inventor is its ability to modify a solid and have it conform to the geometrical and dimensional
constraints applied to it when it was constructed without having to redraw it. In this module, the
basics of modifying solid models is taught. The Inventor Advanced eBook will cover the more
advanced methods of modifying solid models.
Working with the Browser Bar
The Browser bar is used extensively as a tool to assist you when modifying solid models. It
displays the work features and the part features for the current part.
Features
Work features are the basic sketching planes (XY, XZ, YZ), the axes (X, Y, Z) and the Center
Point as shown in Figure 20-1. Part features are the 3D features added to the solid model in
model construction. The part features for the active part are shown in Figure 20-2.

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure 20-1
Work Features
Figure 20-2
Part Features

Edges and Faces

Edges are the lines, circles, or arcs located between the planes that form the solid model. Faces
are the planes between the edges of the solid. A face can also be circular or cylindrical in shade,
for example the hole in the model. Figure 20-3 shows each visible face of a solid model in a
different color.

Figure 20-3
Edges and Faces

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-3

Modifying a Solid Model

Step 1 Open the part file: Inventor Workalong 20-1.ipt. This is

one of the parts that you received when you download your
eBook. It should be in the folder: Lab Exercise. (Figure Step 1A
and 1B)

Figure Step 1A Figure Step 1B

Step 2 The Filter icon located at the top of the Browser bar allows you to enable or disable the
visibility of the features in the Browser bar. Click the Filter icon. The filter list will display. (Figure
Step 2A and 2B)

Figure
Step 2A

Figure Step 2B

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 3 Click Hide Work Features to enable it. The work features are now hidden for the current
part. (Figure Step 3A and 3B)

Figure Step 3A Figure Step 3B

Step 4 Since you want the work features to display most of the
time, click the Filter icon again and disable the Hide Work
Features. (Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 4

Step 5 The Part icon is the first icon inside the Browser bar window. It displays the name of the
active part. (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-5

Step 6 Right-click the part name. In the Right-click menu, click

Expand All Children. Note how all the folders and part features
will expand to display every feature in the current part. Right click
the menu again and this time, click Collapse All Children. (Figure
Step 6A, 6B, and 6C)

Figure Step 6A

Figure Step 6B

Figure Step 6C

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 7 Right-click the part feature Extrusion1. In the Right-click menu, click Show Dimensions.
Note how the 2D sketch dimensions and the extrusion dimension will display on the model.
(Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Step 8 Right-click Extrusion1 again. In the Right-click menu, click Edit Sketch. The Graphic
window will change to Sketch mode and display the sketch. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-7

Step 9 Double click any dimension in the sketch and the Edit Dimension dialogue box will open as
shown in the figure. You could now change the dimension, if required, which in turn will change
the size of the model. Close the dialogue box without making any changes and return to Model
mode. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Step 10 Right-click Extrusion1. In the right-click menu,

click Edit Feature. Since this feature is an extrusion, the
Extrude dialogue box will open. If required, the extrude
feature could be edited. Click the Cancel button to close
it. (Figure Step 10A and 10B)

Figure Step 10A

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 10B

Step 11 Right-click Extrusion3 as shown in the figure. In the right-click menu, click Find in
Window. Note how the extrude on the left side will fully display in the window. This is a handy
feature to use when your part is complicated or if you are using a part you are not familiar with.
(Figure Step 11)

Figure Step 11

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-9

Step 12 Using what you learned in Steps 8 to 11, edit the sketch in Extrusion1 to match the
dimensions shown in the figure. When you are done, click Finish Sketch to return to Model mode
and the model will resize to reflect the changes you made to the dimensions. (Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 12

Step 13 Edit Extrusion1 to change the extrusion depth from 3 inches to 4 inches. Click OK.
(Figure Step 13)

Figure Step 13

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 14 Edit the dimensions in the sketch for the part feature Extrusion4 to the dimensions
shown in the figure. Return to Model mode. (Figure Step 14A and 14B)

Figure Step 14B

Figure Step 14A

Step 15 Since Sketch1 is an unconsumed sketch, it can be

deleted. Select it and right click it. In the Right-click menu,
select Delete. (Figure Step 15)

Figure Step 15

Author's Comments: The names of the part features in the Browser bar can be renamed to
names that make more sense to the user. To change a name, click the existing name twice in
the Browser bar and it will change to edit mode.

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-11

.Step 16 Expand the children. Change the name of Sketch2 to Base Sketch - Front View.
(Figure Step 16A and 16B)

Figure Step 16A

Figure Step 16B

Step 17 Change the names of all the part features and their children to match the names in the
figure. Change the name of the part to: Inventor Workalong 20-1 Finished.ipt as shown in the
figure. (Figure Step 17)

Figure Step 17

Author's Comments: When you edit the name of the file in the Browser bar, it will NOT change the
name of the current file. When you save the file, it will be saved with it original name.

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author's Comments: At the end of the part features in the Browser bar is the End of Part icon.
Inventor will stop displaying the model when it finds this icon in the part features list. The icon can
be dragged to any location desired.
Step 18 Move the cursor onto the End of Part icon and hold down the left mouse button. When the
End of Part has a red rectangle around it, drag it to the location shown in the figure. (Figure Step
18A, 18B, and 18C)

Figure Step 18A

Figure Step 18B

Figure Step 18C

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-13

Step 19 Drag the End of Part icon back to the bottom of the part feature list in the Browser bar.
(Figure Step 19A and 19B)

Figure Step 19B

Figure Step 19A

Step 20 Using the SAVEAS command, save the file with the name:
Inventor Workalong 20-1 Finished. Close the part.

Measuring the Model

Inventor has four commands available to measure distances, angles, loops lengths and areas.
They also allow the user to set the units and decimal precision of how it displays the answers.
Answers can be accumulated. Measurements can be made in either 3D (Model mode) or 2D
(Sketch mode).

Inventor Command: MEASURE DISTANCE

MEASURE ANGLE
MEASURE LOOP
MEASURE AREA
The MEASURE command is used to measure distances, angles, loops lengths and areas. It can
be used in model mode or sketch mode. If it is used in Model mode, it measures in 3D and in
Sketch mode, it measures in 2D.
Shortcut: None

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Measuring a Solid Model

Step 1 Open part file: Inventor Workalong 20-1.ipt. (Figure Step 1)

Figure Step 1

Step 2 Click the MEASURE DISTANCE command. The Measure Distance dialogue box will
display as shown in the figure. Move this dialogue box close to your model to make measuring
easier. (Figure Step 2).

Figure Step 2

Step 3 Note that when you are in Measuring mode, the Graphic cursor appears as a
ruler icon. The ruler icon indicates that you are measuring in document units. This will
be covered in greater detail later in the module. (Figure Step 3) Figure
Step 3

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-15

Step 4 Move the cursor to the bottom left corner of the model and click the left mouse button.
Note how it displays a small snap circle indicating that you are snapping to an exact endpoint.
(Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 4

Step 5 When you snap to a location on the model, the XYZ coordinate location will display as shown
in the figure. In this case, it is X0Y0Z0 of the model or the Center Point. (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 6 To clear the Measure Distance dialogue box and start a new measurement, click the small
triangle inside the dialogue box. In the pull-down menu, select Restart. (Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6

Step 7 Move the cursor to bottom right corner of the right side of the model. Click it to snap to the
corner. The XYZ location will display in the dialogue box as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-17

Step 8 Clear the dialogue box by clicking Restart. Measure the length of an edge. Move the
cursor onto the left edge of the right side of the model as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Step 9 When you click the mouse, the length of the edge will display in the dialogue box. In this
case, it is 3 inches long. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 10 While the dialogue box is still displaying the length of the edge, click the opposite edge.
Note how the dialogue box now displays both the length of the edge and the distance between the
edges. A line showing the measured distance will display to show you what is being measured.
(Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Step 11 To measure a three dimensional distance,

click the two corners shown in the figure. The 3D
dimension between the corners will display as well as
the XYZ location of the last corner and the delta XYZ
distances. (Figure Step 11A and 11B)

Figure Step 11A

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-19

Figure Step 11B

Step 12 Measure the angle between the two edges by

clicking the small triangle at the end of the dialogue box.
In the pull-down menu, select Measure Angle. Select the
two edges. The angle will display graphically and as an
exact number in decimal degrees. (Figure Step 12A and
12B)

Figure Step 12A

Figure Step 12B

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 20 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 13 Change the command to Measure Loop. Click the face on the Front view. Note how the
complete loop (the perimeter) around the front plane will highlight and the loop distance of 22
inches will display in the dialogue box. (Figure Step 13A and 13B)

Figure Step 13A

Figure Step 13B

Step 14 Measure the area of the right side face by changing the command to Measure Area. Click
the face on the right side and the area to be measured will highlight. The area will display in the
dialogue box. Since there is a hole in this plane, the area will be measured minus the hole. (Figure
Step 14A and 14B)

Figure Step 14A

Figure Step 14B

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-21

Step 15 Suppress the hole feature on the right side face so that you can measure the area of the
face without subtracting the hole. Right-click the feature in the Browser bar. In the Right-click menu,
select Suppress Feature. Note how Extrusion4 is now grayed out. (Figure Step 15)

Figure Step 15

Step 16 Using what you just learned, measure the area of the right-side minus the hole. After you
measure it, unsuppress the hole feature. (Figure Step 16)

Figure Step 16

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 22 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 17 Click Tools and then click Document Settings. This will open the Document Setting
dialogue box for the current part. Do not make any changes at this time. Click Close to close the
dialogue box. (Figure Step 17A and 17B)

Figure Step 17A

Figure Step 17B

Author's Comments: The units and precision that Inventor has been displaying to your
measurement commands have been preset in the document settings. Document settings are
preset in the template file that you selected when you started the part. If required, you can make
changes to the settings.

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-23

Step 18 Enter the MEASURE command. Click the small triangle at the end. In the pull-down An
menu, select Precision and then 5 places. example of an area measurement with a precision
of 5 decimals points is shown in the figure. (Figure Step 18)

Figure Step 18

Step 19 Change the precision to display All Decimals. A sample of an answer to an area
measurement is shown in the figure. (Figure Step 19)

Author's Comments:
When the precision is set to
All Decimals, the Graphic
cursor will change to the
Micrometer icon as shown in
Figure below.

Figure Step 19

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 24 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 20 Change the precision back to three decimal places. (Figure Step 20)

Figure Step 20

Step 21 Change the color to: Aluminum Cast. (Figure Step 21)

Figure Step 21

Step 22 Save and close the part.

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-25

Geometry Lesson
Physical Properties
Mass - the quantity of the matter contained in the solid model. This is determined by multiplying the
volume of the solid times the density of the material it is made from. Mass is not dependent on
gravity which makes it different but proportional to the weight. Mass is used when considering a
measure of a solid’s resistance to inertia.

Volume - The amount of space occupied by the solid model.

Density - The weight of material usually expressed per cubic inch or cubic millimeter.
i.e. 21.55^3in or 42.87^3mm

Center of Gravity - Geometrical center of the solid model. It is also called the centroid. If the
density of the solid is uniform, the center of gravity or centroid is located at
the center of the mass.

Mass = Volume X Density Expressed as lbmass, grams or kg

Area = Length X Width of a 2D plane. Expressed as sq in or sq mm. ie. 10.5^2in or 23.5^2mm

Volume - cubic inches or millimeters. Expressed as cu in or cu mm ie. 120.5^3in or

55.3^3mm
lbmass - pounds
kg - kilograms 1 kg = 1000 grams 1 kg = 2.2 pounds
in - inches
mm - millimeters 1 in = 25.4 mm

Inventor will display answers in scientific notation to control the number of decimals displayed:
For Example
1,250,000 = 1.25E+006 (move the decimal 6 places positively)
0.0001 = 1.0E-004 (move the decimal 4 places negatively)

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 26 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Face Coloring
Sometimes it is helpful to be able to change the color of a face. This is especially helpful when
working with complex parts or to display different textures on a model. For example, this can
happen during manufacturing when a part is cast and has machined surfaces. By applying the
cast material to the part and then changing the faces of the machined areas to a polished
texture/color, the model will appear more realistic.
A face color overrides the part color and, if applicable, the feature color for selected faces. In this
module, only faces coloring will be taught. The general rules when changing the color of faces are:

1 A face color overrides the part feature color which in turn overrides the part color.
2 If the part has been assigned a transparent color, the face color you apply will change the color
but it will be transparent.
3 If a thread texture is applied to the feature, a change to the face color affects the base color
used in the thread texture.
4 If the face color has been changed and the feature is colored as a pattern, the patterned
features will not display the face color.

Figure 20-3
Edges and Faces

Physical Properties
The physical properties of a solid model include the mass, volume, center of gravity, and inertial
properties. Using the physical properties helps you to evaluate how the designed model
correlates to its physical counterpart. For example, the weight of a solid model made from
different materials could easily be found.
Assigning the Material to the Model
Up to this point in the eBook, only color or texture has been assigned to the solid model. In this
module, assigning the actual material that the part is made from will be taught.

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-27

Coloring Faces and Working with Physical Properties

Step 1 Open part file: Inventor Workalong 20-1.ipt. (Figure Step 1)

Figure Step 1

Step 2 Click the right side face to select it and right click the mouse. In the Right-click menu,
select Properties. In the Face Properties dialogue box, select: Blue - Wall Paint - Glossy.
(Figure Step 2A, 2B, and 2C)

Figure Step 2A

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 28 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 2B

Figure Step 2C

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-29

Step 3 Using what you just learned, change three additional faces as shown in the figure to
Green, Orange and Red. (Figure Step 3)

Figure Step 3

Step 4 Click the View tab. Click the CENTER OF GRAVITY command. Note how the Center of
Gravity icon will display located at the center of gravity or centroid of the model. It also displays the
positive X, Y and Z axis. (Figure Step 4A and 4B)

Figure Step 4A

Figure Step 4B

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 30 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 5 Rotate the model so that you can see the location of Center of Gravity icon from a
better viewpoint . (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Step 6 Disable the display of the Center of Gravity icon.

Step 7 Right-click the part name in the Browser bar. In the Right-click menu, select iProperties. This
will open the Properties dialogue box for the current part. (Figure step 7A and 7B)

Figure Step 7A

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-31

Figure Step 7B
Author's Comments: When a Default material is assigned it means that no actual material has been
assigned to the part. Even though the color of the solid is set to Aluminum (Cast), that is only the
appearance of the model. The material that the solid model is made from must also be assigned.

Step 8 Enable the Physical tab. Note how the material is shown as Default. Pull down the
Material list and select: Aluminum 6061. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 32 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 9 Change the Requested Accuracy to Very High. The Density box displays the density of the
material: Aluminum 6061. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Step 10 Using what you learned earlier in the workalong, open the Document Settings dialogue box
and in the Units tab, change the Mass to gram. (Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-33

Step 11 Note how the mass (weight)

is now displayed in grams. (Figure
Step 11)
Step 12 Change the material to:
Cast Steel. Note how the density
and the mass change since steel is
much denser then aluminum.
Step 13 Change the material back to:
Aluminum-6061. Close the
Properties dialogue box.

Step 14 Save and close the part.

Figure Step 11

The Key Principles in Module 20

1 The Browser bar is used extensively as a tool to assist you when modifying solid models.
2 Work features are the basic sketching planes (XY, XZ, YZ), the axes (X, Y, Z) and the Center
Point. Part features are the 3D features added to the solid model in model construction.
3 Edges are the lines, circles or arcs located between the planes that form the solid model.
Faces are the planes between the edges of the solid.
4 Inventor has four commands available to measure distances, angles, loops lengths, and areas.
They also allow you to set the units and decimal precision of how it displays the answers. Answers
can be accumulated. Measurements can be made in either 3D (Model mode) or 2D (Sketch mode)
mode.

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 20-34 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 20-1 Time Allowed: 60 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 20-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeters
Template: N/A Color: Aluminum (Cast) Material: Aluminum - 6061

Step 1 Open the part: Inventor Lab 19-3.ipt that you

created in Module 19. (Figure Step 1)
Step 2. Save the file as: Inventor Lab 20-1.
Step 3 Change the model color to: Aluminum (Cast).
Step 4 Expand All the Children in the Browser bar.

Step 5 Edit the Base sketch and change the dimensions of

the overall length from 180 to 200 and the overall width from
140 to 175 in the figure. (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 1
Modified Solid Model

Figure Step 5
Editing the Base Sketch

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-35

Step 6. Edit the feature Extrusion1 and change the thickness of the base sketch from 15mm to 20
mm. Return to model mode.
Step 7 Using the next five figures below, change the colors of the machined faces shown to:
Aluminum (Polished). (Figure Step 7A, 7B, 7C, 7D, and 7E)

Figure Step 7A
Solid Model - Colored Faces

Figure Step 7B
Solid Model - Colored Faces

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 36 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 7C
Solid Model - Colored Faces

Figure Step 7D
Solid Model - Colored Faces

Figure Step 7E
Solid Model - Colored Faces

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-37

Lab Exercise 20-2 Time Allowed: 60 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 20-2 Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: N/A Color: Blue Gray (Light) Material: Cast Iron

Step 1 Open part: Inventor Lab 18-2.ipt that you

created in Module 18. (Figure Step 1A and 1B)
Step 2 Save the file as: Inventor Lab 20-2.
Step 3 Change the color to: Blue Gray (Light)
Step 4 Move the End of Part Icon up above the small
fillets as shown below. (Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 1A
Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 4

Figure Step 1B
Solid Model - Without the Small Fillets

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 38 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 5 Find the following with a precision of 5 decimal points. (Figure Step 5)

A The XYZ coordinates of corner A.

____________________________

B The distance from corner B to corner C.

____________________________

C The distance from corner B to corner D.

____________________________

Figure Step 5

D The area of the shaded area the figure. Do NOT

include the area of the cylinder. (Figure Step 5D)

____________________________

E The perimeter of the shaded plane. (Figure Step 5E)

____________________________

Figure Step 5D and 5E)

F The area of the shaded area of the figure

WITHOUT the eight small holes. (Figure Step 5F)

____________________________

Step 6 Move the End of Part icon back to bottom.

Figure Step 5F

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 20-39

Step 7 Using the two figures, change the colors of the

faces shown to: Blue Pastel. (Figure Step 7A and 7B)

Figure Step 7A
Solid Model - Colored Faces

Figure Step 7B
Solid Model - Colored Faces

Step 8 Set the material to: Cast Iron and find the following:

A The mass in pounds.

____________________________

B The mass in grams.

____________________________

Step 9 Save and close the part.

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

20 - 40 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

Modifying Solid Models ©2004 - 2020 Module 20

 Inventor ® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 21
Competency Test No. 4

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Within a two hour time limit, complete a written exam and the lab exercise.

Competency Tests
The Inventor eBook was written with competency based modules. What that means is that you
have not completed each module until you have mastered it. The Competency Test module
contains multiple choice questions and a comprehensive lab exercise to test your mastery of the set
of modules that you completed. There are no answers or keys supplied in a Competency Test
module since it is meant to be checked by your instructor. If there are any parts of this module that
you have trouble completing, you should go back and reread the module or modules containing the
information that you are having trouble with. If necessary, redo as many lab exercises required until
you fully understand the material.
If you are Completing this eBook Without the Aid of an Instructor
Complete the written test and the lab exercise.
If you are Completing this eBook in a Classroom with an Instructor
The instructor will give instructions on what to do after you have completed this module.

Competency Test No. 4 ©2004 - 2020 Module 21

21 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Inventor
Competency Test No. 4
Open Book
Multiple Choice Questions
Select the BEST answer.

1 When you are selecting objects with a window, which window selects all the objects that are totally
inside it and the ones that it crosses?
A) Square Window
B) Crossing Window
C) Extruded Window
D) Rectangular Window
E) Polygon Window
2 What is the name for two or more objects that are connected at their endpoints and then
treated as one object in the OFFSET command?
A) Loop
B) Continuous
C) Area
D) Polyloop
E) Window
3 What are the basic sketching planes (XY, XZ, YZ), the three axis (X, Y, Z) and the Center
Point called?
A) Work Planes
B) Work Points
C) Work Features
D) Work Sketches
E) Work Axis
4 What is the maximum number of sides that the POLYGON command can draw a regular
polygon?
A) 20
B) 100
C) 120
D) 180
E) 256
5 When the graphic cursor appears as a ruler, what units are you measuring in?
Select the BEST answer.
A) English Units
B) Document Units
C) System Units
D) Metric Units
E) Actual Units

Competency Test No. 4 ©2004 - 2020 Module 21

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 21-3

6 What command is used to extend the length of an existing line or an arc?

A) LENGTHEN
B) EXTEND
C) LINE
D) LENGTH
E) STRETCH

7 What does a aligned dimension measure?

A) The delta X or delta Y distance between two points.
B) The diameter of circle or radius of an arc.
C) The true length of a line or the true distance between two points.
D) The horizontal or vertical distance between two points.
E) The angle between two lines or the angle between the imaginary lines between three
points.

8 What best describes the threads created using the THREAD command?
A) Graphical representations of the actual thread.
B) A texture
C) The actual thread.
D) They are enlarged to look better.
E) Center

9 What is a parametric construction plane inserted on the model or in model space called?
A) A Work Plane
B) A Work Point
C) A Work Feature
D) A Work Sketch
E) A Work Model

10 What is an angular dimension measuring?

A) The delta X or delta Y distance between two points.
B) The diameter of circle or radius of an arc.
C) The true length of a line or the true distance between two points.
D) The horizontal or vertical distance between two points.
E) The angle between two lines or the angle between the imaginary lines between three
points.

Competency Test No. 4 ©2004 - 2020 Module 21

 21-4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 21-1 Time Allowed: 2 Hours

Name: Inventor Lab 21-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeters
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt Color: Machined-Aluminum Material: Aluminum-6061

Step 1 Project the Center Point onto the Base plane.

Step 2 Note the location of X0Y0Z0. Draw the necessary sketches and extrude them to produce the
solid model shown below. Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints to
maintain the objects shape and size. All sketches must be fully constrained. (Figure Step 2A and
2B)
Step 3 Create the fillets and chamfers afer the model is totally constructed.
Step 4 Apply the color shown above. (Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 2A
Suggested Base Sketch -
Right Side (YZ) Plane

Figure Step 4
Solid Model
Home View

Competency Test No. 4 ©2004 - 2020 Module 21

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 21-5

Figure Step 2B
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Competency Test No. 4 ©2004 - 2020 Module 21

21 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 6 Move the End of Part Icon up above the fillets as shown in the figure. Suppress all of the
threaded features. (Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6

Step 7 Find the following to a precision of 6

decimal points: (Figure Step 7)
A The XYZ coordinates of corner D.

____________________________
B The length of the edge from corner A to
corner B.

____________________________
C The distance from corner A to corner C.

_____________________________
D The distance from corner C to corner D.

______________________________
Figure Step 7 E The angle between the edges B to C and B
to A.

______________________________

Competency Test No. 4 ©2004 - 2020 Module 21

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 21-7

Step 8 The area of the shaded area of Figure Step

8. Do NOT include the area of features on the plane.

____________________________

Figure Step 8

Step 9 The perimeter of the shaded plane in Figure

Step 9.

____________________________

Figure Step 9

Step 10 The area of the shaded area of Figure Step

10. The area should include the complete surface
without any features.

___________________________
Figure Step 10

Competency Test No. 4 ©2004 - 2020 Module 21

21 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 11 Using the three figures below,

change the colors of the faces shown to:
Aluminum - Polished.
(Figure Step 11A, 11B, and 11C)

Step 12 Set the material to:

Aluminum - 6061 and find the following:

A The mass of the solid in grams.

____________________________

B The mass of the solid in pounds.

____________________________

Figure Step 11A

Figure Step 11B

Figure Step 11C

Competency Test No. 4 ©2004 - 2020 Module 21

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 21-9

Step 12 If you are a student completing this course in a classroom setting, your instructor will give
you instructions on what to do after you complete this module.
If you are an online student doing this course by correspondence, send an email to your instructor
with the answers from the measurement questions in this module. For example:
7A The XYZ coordinates of corner D is ___________ .

7B The length of the edge from corner A to corner B is ___________ .

7C The distance from corner A to corner C is ___________ .

7D The distance from corner C to corner D is ___________ .

7E The angle between the edges B to C and B to A is ___________ .

8. The area of the shaded area of Figure Step 8 is ___________ .

9. The perimeter of the shaded plane in Figure Step 9 is ___________ .

10. The area of the shaded area of Figure Step 10 is ___________ .

12A The mass of the solid model in grams is ___________ .

12B The mass of the solid model in pounds is ___________ .

The answers in the email can be given as follows:

7A ___________ .

7B ___________ .

7C ___________ .

7D ___________ .

7E ___________ .

8. ___________ .

9. ___________ .

10. ___________ .

12A___________ .

12B___________ .

Competency Test No. 4 ©2004 - 2020 Module 21

21 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

Competency Test No. 4 ©2004 - 2020 Module 21

 Inventor® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 22
Assemblies

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Describe an assembly and explain the difference between a top-down and a bottom-up
assembly.
2 Describe and apply the SLICE GRAPHICS command.
3 Describe the PLACE COMPONENT and PLACE CONSTRAINT commands and apply them to
assemble a series of parts to create an assembled model.

An Assembly File
An assembly file contains the information required to assemble two or
more part files to create an assembled model. See Figure 22-1. As
the model is assembled, assembly constraints must be assigned so
that each part knows how it aligns or fits with the other parts in the
assembled model. A part (.ipt) file that has been placed in the
assembly can be edited while in the assembly file and the
modifications will be saved back to the original part file. On the other
hand, if the original part file is modified after the assembly file has
being created, the modifications will automatically display in the
assembly. An assembly file does not actually contain any of the part
files that are placed in the file, it simply contains a reference to them.
A reference is a link back to the part files. The part files that have
been placed in an assembly file must be available to Inventor to
display them when an assembly file is opened. The current project
file keeps track of those links and will automatically keep track of the
location of all the part files. If an assembly file is sent to a client or an
associate, the part files that were placed in the assembly file must Figure 22-1
also be included. An Assembled Model

Creating an Assembly File

To create an assembly file, use the NEW command and select an assembly template rather than a
part template. An assembly file has the extension .iam. IAM is an acronym for Inventor AsseMbly.

An assembly file contains the information required to assemble two or more part
files to create the assembled model. An assembly file has the file extension .iam.
IAM is an acronym for Inventor AsseMbly.

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Bottom-up vs Top-down
Assembly files can be created using either the bottom-up or the top-down method. A bottom-up
assembly is an assembly created from a series of part files that were previously created and
saved in their own .ipt file. A top-down assembly is an assembly file where all parts of the
assembly are created on the fly. In other word, they are created in the active assembly file, one at
a time. They are aligned and constrained in their correct position in relationship to the other parts
in the assembled model. Inventor will save each part in its own file with the extension .ipt. In the
Inventor eBook, only the bottom-up method is taught.
The Browser Bar in an Assembly
When an assembly is the active file, the Browser bar will
display all of the parts that have been placed in the
assembly. If a part in the browser is expanded it will
display its children which includes its alignment and
constraints to the other parts of the assembled model.
See Figure 22-2.
If the same part is placed more then once into the assembly
file, the Browser bar will number them accordingly. For
example, this may happen if an assembly required two
identical bolts. Only one part file is created and named
Bolt.ipt. It is then placed into the assembly file twice. The
Browser bar would number the bolts parts as follows:

On the first occurrence: Bolt:1

On the second occurrence: Bolt:2

Figure 22-2
An Assemble in
the Browser Bar

Inventor Command: SLICE GRAPHICS

The SLICE GRAPHICS command is used to slice away the model on the active sketching plane
temporarily removing all of the material in front of the sketching plane. The sketching plane must
be active before using this command.
Shortcut: F7

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-3

Creating the Parts for an Assembly

Step 1 Check the default project and if necessary, set it to Inventor Course.

Step 2 Use the following instructions to complete all parts in this workalong. Create the
following parts and ensure that you do the following:
A Each part must be saved in its own .ipt file.
B Project the Center Point onto the Base sketch plane and note the location of X0Y0Z0.
C Draw the necessary sketches and extrude or revolve them to produce the solid model shown.
Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints to fully constrain each sketch.
D Apply the color and material shown.
Step 3 Construct Part A. (Figure Step 3A, 3B, and 3C)
Part: Base
Part Name: Inventor Workalong 22-1A
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt
Color: Stainless - Brushed
Material: Stainless Steel

Figure Step 3A
Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 3B
Solid Model - Orbited View
Figure Step 3C

Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 4 Construct Part B. (Figure Step 4A and 4B)

Note: See Steps 3 to 14 if you require help creating this model.
Part: Post
Part Name: Inventor Workalong 22-1B
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt
Color: Chrome - Black Polished
Material: Steel

Figure Step 4A
Solid Model -
Home View

Step 5 Draw the Base model of part

22-1B by extruding circles. Your
Base model should appear as
shown in the figure. (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 4B
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing Figure Step 5

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-5

Step 6 Start a new sketch on the top of the model and draw a construction line from the center to
the edge of the top plane along the Y axis as shown in the figure. Hint: Ensure that you draw the
line along the Y axis by snapping to the center of the circle and to the grid on the Y axis. The
length of the line is not important. (Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6

Step 7 Insert a Work Plane in the center of the model using the Perpendicular to a Line method.
Enter the WORK PLANE command and move the cursor to the end of the construction line. The
Work Plane icon will display as shown in the figure. Click the end of the line when the icon
displays. (Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Before drawing each part, the orientation of the part when it is placed in the
future assembly, should be considered. Doing that, will save a lot of time when
creating the assembly model since it can be placed without any manipulation.

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 8 Move the cursor onto the Y axis and it will display as shown in the figure. When the Y axis
is displayed, click it and the Work Plane will display as shown. (Figure Step 8A and 8B)

Figure Step 8A

Figure Step 8B

Step 9 Enlarge the Work Plane to extend it past the edges of the model. One way to do this is to
use the LOOK AT/VIEW FACE command and change the view so that it is looking perpendicular
to the plane as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-7

Step 10 Start a new sketch on the Work Plane. (Figure 10)

Figure Step 10

Step 11 Enter the SLICE GRAPHIC command (F7) and the model will
display from the sketching plane back. Disable the grid display. It is
easier to draw this sketch without the grid. (Figure Step11)

Figure Step 11

When enlarging the work plane, the

cursor must display as the Stretch Move Stretch
Cursor (two arrows) as shown. If you Cursor Cursor
have trouble changing the cursor from
the Move Cursor, zoom in closer and move the cursor
onto one of the corners of the plane.

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 12 Using the PROJECT GEOMETRY command, project the Z axis and the X axis onto the
sketching plane. (Figure Step 12A and 12B)

Figure Step 12A

Figure Step 12B

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-9

Step 13 Using the OFFSET command, construct offsets to both the Z and X axis to start the
construction of the slot. Trim the lines in the sketch and insert the dimensions to fully constrain
the sketch. Ensure that you dimension from both sides of the Z axis as shown in the figure.
(Figure Step 13A and 13B)

Figure Ste p 13A

Figure Step 13B

An assembly file does do not contain any of the part files that are placed in the
assembled model. It simply contains a reference to the part files. A reference is a
link back to the part files. The part files that have been placed in an assembly file
must be available to Inventor to display them when the assembly file is opened.
The project file keeps track of those links and will automatically keep track of the location of all
the files. If an assembly file (.iam) is sent to a client or an associate, the part files (.ipt) that were
placed in the assembly file must also be included otherwise they will not display when the file is
opened.

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 14 Extrude the sketch. Set it to extrude in both directions and to cut. Set the distance to All.
Complete the part by adding the hole, the threads, the fillets, the color, and the material as specified
on page 22-4. (Figure 14A, 14B, and 14C)

Figure Step 14A

Figure 14B
Figure 14C

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-11

Step 15 Create Part C. (Figure Step 15A, 15B, 15C, and 15D):
Part: Wedge Ring
Part Name: Inventor Workalong 22-1C
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt
Color: Titanium - Polished
Material: Titanium

Figure Step 15A

Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 15B

Solid Model
- Orbited View

Figure Step 15C

Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Author's Comments: If you project the X and Z axis onto the

plane, the same way you did in Step 12 and then construct
arcs and offset lines it will be much easier to construct the
Base sketch for this part. The last step is to revolve the sketch Figure Step 15D
to complete the solid model. The Base Sketch

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 16 Construct Part D. (Figure Step 16A and 16B)

Part: Wedge
Part Name: Inventor Workalong 22-1D
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt
Color: Chrome - Polished
Material: Steel

Figure Step 16A

Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 16B

Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Step 17 Change the face color of the top face of the part to: Metal Steel (Knurled) as shown in
Figure 16A.

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-13

Step 18 Construct Part F as follows:

(Figure Step 18A and 18B)
Part: Handle
Part Name: Inventor Workalong 22-1E
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt
Color: Metal-AL-6061 - Machined
Material: Steel

Figure Step 18A

Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 18B

Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 19 Construct Part E as follows: (Figure Step 19A, 19B, and 19C)
Part: Screw
Part Name: Inventor Workalong 22-1F
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt
Color: Metal-AL-6061 - Machined
Material: Steel

Figure Step 19B

Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 19A

Dimensioned Multiview Drawing Figure Step
19C
Step 20 Change the face color of the cylindrical top of the part to: Solid Model -
Metal Steel (Knurled) as shown in the solid model figure. Orbited View

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-15

Inventor Command: PLACE COMPONENT

The PLACE COMPONENT command is used to insert a part or a component into an assembly file.
Shortcut: P

Inventor Command: PLACE CONSTRAINT

The PLACE CONSTRAINT command is used to apply constraints of one part to another in the
assembled model.
Shortcut: C

Grounded Parts
By default, the first part that is placed into an assembly file will be grounded. A grounded part is a
part that has all of it degrees of freedom removed and is fully constrained in that file. It is important
to ground at least one part of every assembly. If no parts are grounded, the assembly can be
moved around in model space. Once one part is
grounded, the other parts can be constrained to it making their
movement relative to the grounded part. If required, more then
one part can be grounded.
In the Browser bar, a grounded part will display a Push Pin
icon as shown in Figure 22-3 and 22-4. To enable or disable a
part being grounded, right-click the part in the Browser bar. In
the Right-click menu, select Grounded. In Figure 22-5, the
selected part is currently grounded, enabled and visible.

Figure 22-3
Figure 22-4 Grounded Part as it Displays in
Grounded Part Icon the Browser Bar

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Part Visibility
The visibility of parts in an assembly can be enabled or
disabled. When the part's visibility is disabled in the
assembly, the part's icon in the Browser bar will display
greyed out.
Enabled Parts
Parts can be enabled or disabled in the assembly file. If a
part is enabled, it displays and can be selected in the
assembly. If it is disabled, only an outline displays and It
cannot be selected. Sometimes it is easier to disable some
parts to make it easier to place additional parts.
Assembly Constrains
There are many different constraints used when creating
an assembly. In this module, only the mate constraint will
be taught. A mate constraint constrains two assembled
parts to one another by mating their centerlines and/or by
mating a face on one part to a face on the other part.
Mating is the most common way to assemble two parts
together. It often takes more then one constraint to
assemble two parts together. Both parts must have a
symmetrical feature to mate them using the centerline
method.
Figure 22-5
The Right-click Menu for a Part
in an Assembly File

By default, the first part that is placed into an assembly file will be grounded. A
grounded part is a part that has all of it degrees of freedom removed and is fully
constrained in that file. It is important to ground at least one part in every assembly
since if no parts are grounded, the assembly can be moved around model space.
Once one part is grounded, the other parts can be constrained to it making their
movement relative to the grounded part.

The Browser bar contains a great deal of

information about the active assembly file. The
grounded part has a Push Pin icon. If a part is
disabled, it will display a green part icon and if
its visibility is disabled, the part icon will be grey
as you can see in the figure.

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-17

Creating an Assembly
Step 1 Check the default project and if necessary, set it to Inventor Course.

Step 2 Using the NEW command, enable the English tab and select the temple file:
Modules Assembly (in).iam. Save and name the assembly: Inventor workalong 22-1.
.(Figure Step 2)

Figure
Step 2

Step 3 Enter the PLACE COMPONENT command. In the Place Component dialogue box insert part
files: Inventor Workalong 22-1A.ipt and Inventor Workalong 22-1B.ipt into the assembly file. (Figure
Step 3A and 3B)

Figure Step 3A

By default, the PLACE COMPONENT command places multiple parts. To insert

the part more than once into the assembly file, click once for each part. Ensure
that you move the cursor so you are not inserting one part on top of another one.
When you have inserted the required part(s), press Esc to exit the command.

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author's Comments: Where you locate the parts is not important but ensure that you insert
each part only once.

Step 4 Disable the grounding of part 22-1A

and enable the grounding of part 22-1B.
(Figure Step 4A, 4B, and 4C)

Figure Step 3B

Figure Step 4A

Figure Step 4B

Figure Step 4C

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-19

Step 5 Enter the PLACE CONSTRAINT command. In the Place Constraint dialogue box set
Type to Mate, Selections to 1, Offset to 0.000 and Solution to Mate. (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Step 6 Move the cursor onto the part 22-1A and move it until the Centerline constraint symbol
appears. When it displays as shown in the figure, select it. Move the cursor onto the part 22-1B
and do the same. Part 22-1A will move onto Part 22-1B. Click Apply. (Figure Step 6A, 6B, and 6C)

Figure Step 6A

Figure Step 6B

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 20 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author's Comments: Since part 22-1B is the grounded part, it

will remain stationary and part 22-1A will move.

Step 7 Move the cursor onto the top of the base on part 22-1B as
shown in the figure. The mate arrow will display pointing up.
Press F4 and rotate the model. Select the mate constraint for the
bottom of the part 22-1A. (Figure Step 7A, 7B, and 7C)

Figure Step 6C

Figure Step 7A

Figure Step 7B Figure Step 7C

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-21

Step 8 Press F6 to change the Home view. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Step 9 Enter the PLACE COMPONENT (P) command and insert part 22-1C, 22-1D, 22-1E, and 22-
1F. Ensure that you place each part only once. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 22 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 10 Using what you just learned, assemble and constrain part 22-1C. (Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Step 11 Using the PLACE CONSTRAINT command, constrain the arc in part 22-1D to the arc in
part 22-1C. (Figure Step 11)

Figure Step 11

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-23

Step 12 In the Offset box, set the offset to 0.015. Enable the Pick Part First box. See the
Author's Comments below. (Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 12

Author's Comments: The offset number was calculated by subtracting the width of the slot
(0.75) and the width of the wedge (0.72) and then dividing by 2. That will center the Wedge in the
slot of the Post.
Author's Comments: When the Pick Part First box is enabled, the PLACE CONSTRAINT command
allows the user to select the part first and then the constraint to be used. Sometimes it is easier to
use the two pick method.
Step 13 To constrain the wedge in the slot, select one side of the slot and one side of the
wedge as the mate surfaces. (Figure Step 13A, 13B, and 13C)

Figure Step 13B

Figure Step 13A

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 24 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 13C

Step 14 Using what you just learned, constrain the last two
parts to complete the assembly. (Figure Step 14)
Author's Comments: You will have to constrain both parts
with a centerline constraint and an offset constraint.

Step 15 Save and close the file.

Figure Step 14

The Key Principles in Module 22

1 An assembly file contains the information required to assemble two or more part files to create
the assembled model. An assembly file has the file extension .iam.
2 An assembly file does do not contain any of the part files that are placed in the assembled
model. It simply contains a reference to the part files. If an assembly file (.iam) is sent to a client or
an associate, the part files (.ipt) that were placed in the assembly file must also be included
otherwise they will not display when the assembly file is opened.
3 By default, the first part that is placed into an assembly file will be grounded. A grounded part is
a part that has all of it degrees of freedom removed and is fully constrained in that file.
4 There are many different constraints used when creating an assembly. A mate constraint
constrains two assembled parts to one another by mating their centerlines and/or by mating a
plane on one part to a plane on the other part.

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-25

Lab Exercise 22-1 Time Allowed: 180 Min.

Part Name: Inventor Lab 22-1 Project: Inventor Course Units: Millimeters
Template: See Below Color: See Below Material: See Below

Step 1 Create the following parts.

Step 2 Each part must have its own file. In each part, ensure
that you do the following:
A Select your own location of X0Y0Z0.
B Draw the necessary sketches and extrude or revolve them to
produce the solid model shown. Apply all of the necessary
geometrical and dimensional constraints to fully constrain all
sketches. (Figure Step 2A and 2B)
C Apply the color and material shown.
Author's Comments: Ensure that you draw each part in the
correct orientation so that they can be assembled together.
Part:: Tire
Part Name: Inventor Lab 22-1A Figure Step 2A
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt Solid Model - Home View
Color: Rubber - Green - Version 1.1
Material: Rubber

Figure Step 2B
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 26 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Part: Frame
Part Name: Inventor Lab 22-1B
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt
Color: Aluminum - Polished
Material: Steel
(Figure Step 2C and 2D)

Figure Step 2C
Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 2D
Dimensioned Multiview drawing

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-27

Part : Bushing
Part Name: Inventor Lab 22-1C
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt
Color: Brass - Satin
Material: Brass
(Figure Step 2E and 2F)

Figure Step 2E
Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 2F
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 28 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Part : Pin
Part Name: Inventor Lab 22-1D
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt
Color: Semi - Polished
Material: Steel
(Figure Step 2G, 2H and 2J)

Figure Step 2H
Figure Step 2G Solid Model - Orbited View
Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 2J

Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-29

Part : 10 mm Nut
Part Name: Inventor Lab 22-1E
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt
Color: Semi - Polished
Material: Steel
(Figure Step 2K and 2L)

Figure Step 2K
Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 2L
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 30 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Part : Bolt
Part Name: Inventor Lab 22-1F
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt
Color: Semi - Polished
Material: Steel
(Figure Step 2M and 2N)

Figure Step 2M
Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 2N
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-31

Part: 12 mm Nut
Part Name: Inventor Lab 22-1G
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt
Color: Semi-Polished
Material: Steel
(Figure Step 2P and 2Q)

Figure Step 2P
Solid Model - Home
View

Figure Step 2Q
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 32 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Part: Washer
Part Name: Inventor Lab 22-1H
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt
Color: Semi-Polished
Material: Steel
(Figure Step 2R and 2S)

Figure Step 2R
Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 2S
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 22-33

Step 3 Open a new assembly file.

Assembly: Caster
File Name: Inventor Lab 22-1.iam
Template: Metric - Modules Assembly (mm).iam
Step 4 Set the Tire as the grounded part.
Step 5 Start with assembling the Bushing into the Tire first.
(Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Step 6 Assemble the remaining parts to complete the assemble file. (Figure Step 6A and 6B)
Author's Comments: There are 2 washers. One above and one below the frame.

Figure Step 6B
Figure Step 6A Assembled Model -
Assembled Model - Home View Orbited View

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

22 - 34 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

Assemblies ©2004 - 2020 Module 22

 Inventor ® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 23
Presentation Files

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Describe a presentation file, an exploded assembly, and an animation.
2 Describe and apply the CREATE VIEW, PRECISE VIEW ROTATION, TWEAK
COMPONENT, and ANIMATE commands to create, tweak, and play the animation of an
exploded assembly.

Presentation Files
After the model is assembled in the assembly file, a presentation
file can be created using it. A presentation file is a file in which a
view of an assembly is exploded and can be animated. It can also
be rotated so that is can be viewed from different angles. A
presentation file is created using the NEW command and
selecting a presentation template. A presentation file has the
extension .ipn. IPN is an acronym for Inventor PreseNtation.
Exploded Views
An exploded view shows the assembly as if it were dismantled and
the components of the assembly shown in the order and
orientation that they fit together to create the assembly.
Assemblies can be exploded automatically by Inventor, tweaked
manually, or a combination of the two methods, complete with
trails. A tweak is the distance that the part is moved from the
grounded part while the trails are the lines in an exploded view that
show the relationship of the component to the assembly.
Combined, they indicate the direction and distance that a
component was moved to create the view. Exploded assembly
drawings are used in design presentations, catalogues, and
assembly instruction. Figure 23-1 shows an exploded and rotated
view of an assembly.
Animations
An animation is a series of images of an exploded assembly
showing each components tweak at a set interval speed making a
small motion picture of an assembly or a disassembly.
Figure 23-1
An Exploded and Rotated
Presentation Model

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

23 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Tweaking
Tweaking is the process of moving the components
from the grounded component. The tweak is the
distance measured from the grounded unit. In the
automated explosion method, the tweak distance is
same for each part. If the tweak distance is set to 35,
that means the first part is 35 mm from its location and
the second part is 70 mm etc. This can be seen if the
children in the Browser bar are expanded as shown in
Figure 23-2. To tweak components manually, use the
TWEAK COMPONENT command.
Animating the Exploded Assembly
After the exploded assembly is tweaked, it can animated
to show the assembly and the disassembly of the model.
An animation is simply a series of frames or pictures of
the assembly displayed one frame at a time. The
amount of time between frames is called the interval.
The larger the interval, the slower the animation and the
shorter the interval, the faster the animation. The
number of repetitions can also be set.

Figure 23-2
Tweaking

Inventor Command: CREATE VIEW or INSERT MODEL

The CREATE VIEW or INSERT MODEL commands are used to insert the model of the assembly
file.
Shortcut: none

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 23-3

Inventor Command: TWEAK COMPONENTS

The TWEAK COMPONENTS command is used to move a component farther or closer from the
grounded component to create or edit an exploded view of the assembly. It can also be used to
rotate the components.
Shortcut: T

Inventor Command: ANIMATE

The ANIMATE command is used to set the parameters and play an animation of an assembly or
disassembly of a assembled model.
Shortcut: none

A presentation file is a file in which a view of an assembly is created, rotated,

exploded, and animated. To create a presentation file, use the NEW command
and select a presentation template. A presentation file has the extension .ipn.
IPN is an acronym for Inventor PreseNtation.

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

23 - 4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Creating an Assembly and Presentation File

Step 1 Check the default project and if necessary, set it to Inventor Course.
Step 2 Use the following instructions to complete all parts in this workalong.
Create the following parts and ensure that you do the following:
A Each part must be saved in its own .ipt file.
B Project the Center Point onto the Base sketch plane and note the location of X0Y0Z0.
C Draw the necessary sketches and extrude or revolve them to produce the solid model.
Apply all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints to fully constrain it.
D Apply the color and material shown.
Step 3 Create the part file as follows:
Part: Base
Part Name: Inventor Workalong 23-1A
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt
Color: Aluminum Cast Material:
Aluminum 6061 (Figure Step 3A and 3B)

Figure Step 3A
Solid Model - Home View

Step 4 Change the color of the

machined faces to: Mirror.

Figure Step 3B
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 23-5

Part: Slotted Wheel

Part Name: Inventor Workalong 23-1B
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt
Color: Mirror
Material: Chrome - Polished Blue
(Figure Step 4A, 4B, and 4C)

Figure Step 4A
Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 4B
Solid Model - Orbited View

Figure Step 4C
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

23 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Part: Connecting Shaft

Part Name: Inventor Workalong 23-1C
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt
Color: Copper - Polished
Material: Copper
(Figure Step 4D and 4E)

Figure Step 4D
Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 4E
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 23-7

Part: Spacer
Part Name: Inventor Workalong 23-1D
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt
Color: Blue - Wall Paint - Glossy
Material: ABS Plastic
(Figure Step 4F and 4G)

Figure Step 4F
Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 4G
Dimensioned
Multiview Drawing

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

23 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Part: Washer
Part Name: Inventor Workalong 23-1E
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt
Color: Steel - Polished
Material: Steel
(Figure Step 4H and 4J)

Figure Step 4H
Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 4J
Dimensioned
Multiview Drawing

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 23-9

Part: Nut
Part Name: Inventor Workalong 23-1F
Template: Metric-Modules Part (mm).ipt
Color: Steel - Polished
Material: Steel
(Figure Step 4K and 4L)

Figure Step 4K
Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 4L
Dimensioned
Multiview Drawing

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

23 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 5 Assemble all of the parts that you just created as shown in the figures.
Assembly: Slotted Connector
Assembly Name: Inventor Workalong 23-1.iam
Template: Metric-Modules Assembly (mm).iam
(Figure Step 5A and 5B)

Figure Step 5A
Assembly - Home View

Figure Step 5B
Assembly - Orbited View

Step 6 Enter the NEW command and enable the Metric tab. Select the template file:
Modules Presentation (mm).ipn (Figure Step 6)

Figure
Step 6

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 23-11

Step 7 Enter the CREATE VIEW command. It will open the Select Assembly dialogue box.
(Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7

Step 8 Click the Search Folder icon at the end of the file name. It will open the Open dialogue
box. In the Lab Exercises folder, select the file: Inventor Workalong 23-1.iam and click Open.
(Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

23 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 9 In the Select Assembly dialogue box enable Automatic and Create Trails in the Explosion
Method area. Enter the Distance of 35 mm. Click OK. The exploded assembly should appear as
shown in the figure. (Figure Step 9A and 9B)

Figure Step 9A

Figure Step 9B

Step 10 Enter the PRECISE VIEW ROTATION command. In the Incremental View Rotate
dialogue box, set the Increment to 10. (Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Author's Comments: The Increment setting sets the number of degrees the assembly will rotate
per click.

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 23-13

Step 11 Click the Right Rotate icon twice. This will rotate the model 20 degrees to the right. Click
the Up Rotate icon once. This will rotate the model 10 degrees upwards. (Figure Step 11)

Step 12 Enter the TWEAK COMPONENTS command. It will open

the Tweak Component dialogue box. Set it as shown in the figure.
(Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 11

Figure Step 12

Step 13 Ensuring that Direction is enabled, zoom in and move the

cursor on the top of the nut. When the direction icon is displayed as
shown in the figure, click the left mouse button. (Figure Step 13A and
13B)

Author's Comments: Since the Transformations is set to the Z

direction and a distance of 185 mm the Nut will move 185 mm in the Z
Figure Step 13A
direction.

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

23 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 13B

Step 14 Look at the Browser bar for the tweak you just
created. It will show two tweaks for part:
Inventor Workalong 23-1F:1, which is the nut. The 175.000 mm
tweak was created in the automatic explosion in Step 9 and the
185.000 mm from the manual tweak you just completed.
(Figure Step 14)

Author's Comments: The 175.00 mm is 5 X 35.00. The nut is

Figure Step 14 the fifth part to move from the grounded part.

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 23-15

Step 15 Click the Clear button to clear the current settings. Using the Browser bar in Figure
Step 15A, manually tweak the assembly to match the figure shown in Figure Step 15B. (Figure
Step 15A and 15B)

Figure Step 15A

Step 16 Enter the ANIMATE command. It will open the

Animation dialogue box. Set the Interval to 25 and the
Repetitions to 1. (Figure Step 16)
Figure Step 15B

Figure Step 16

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

23 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 17 Study Figure Step 17A, 17B, 17C, and 17D. Play the animation of the assembly that
you created in this workalong. Try the different options allowed in the Motion box. (Figure Step
17A, 17B, 17C, and 17D)

Figure Step 17A

Figure Step 17B

Figure Step 17C

Figure Step 17D

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 23-17

Step 18 Set the Interval to 15 and the Repetitions to 3. Play the animation using these
parameters both forward and in reverse. (Figure Step 18)

Figure Step 18
Step 19 Save and close the file.

The tweaked distance can be edited in the Browser bar. Locate the tweak you
want to change and select it. Once selected, it will highlight and at the bottom of
the browser bar you can change the distance as shown in figure below left. The
revised tweak will display as shown in the figure below right.

The Key Principles in Module 23

1 A presentation file is a file in which a view of an assembly is exploded and can be animated. It
can be rotated so that is can be viewed from different angles
2 An exploded view shows the assembly as if it were dismantled and the components of the
assembly shown in the order and orientation they fit together to create the assembly.
3 A tweak is the distance that the part is moved from the grounded part while the trails are the
lines in an exploded view that show the relationship of the component to the assembly.
4 After the exploded assembly is tweaked, it can animated to show the assembly and the
disassembly of the model. An animation is simply a series of frames or pictures of the assembly
displayed one frame at a time. The amount of time between frames is called the interval.

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

23 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

Presentation Files ©2004 - 2020 Module 23

 Inventor ® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 24
2D Drawings - Part 1

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Describe 2D drawing files, drawing sheets, and drawing sizes.
2 Describe and apply the commands BASE VIEW, PROJECTED VIEW, SECTION VIEW, and
NEW SHEET to create multiview and isometric views of a solid model on a drawing sheet.

Drawing Files
A drawing file contains one or more drawing sheets on which 2 dimensional and/or 3 dimensional
scaled views of the solid models contained in part, assembly, or presentation files. The views can
be created complete with hidden lines or shading. Annotation can be automatically or manually
added to the views as required. A typical drawing sheet with an orthographic, section, and isometric
view of a model is shown in Figure 24-1. Dimensioning, inserting text, and filling in the titleblock are
taught in Module 25. When the drawing is complete, it can be printed or plotted on paper. A drawing
file has the file extension .idw. IDW is an acronym for Inventor DraWing.

Figure 24-1
A Typical Drawing Sheet in a Drawing File

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

24 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Model Views
A model view is a scaled view orientated at an angle and direction that the solid model or
assembly is being viewed and displayed on the drawing sheet. There is no limit to the number of
views or the number of solid models from part, assembly, or presentation files that can be placed
on a drawing sheet. Views can also be automatically annotated or labeled. There are eight
predefined views that you can select from when creating the view. The predefined views are the;
base, projection, auxiliary, section, detail, broken, breakout, and overlay.
The Base View
A Base view is the first view created on the drawing
sheet. It controls the scale, orientation, and location of
the views projected from it. The orthographic and/or
isometric views in the drawing are created from the
Base view. For example, if a multiview drawing was
being created from a solid model, the Front view is
created first as a Base view. The Front view would
control the scale and location of the projected Top and
Right Side views. See Figure 24-2. To change the
scale of all views, only the scale of the Front (Base)
view would have to be changed and the Top and
Right Side views would automatically change scale to
match. If the Front view was moved, the Top and
Right Side views would move accordingly to keep
their multiview position. Figure 24-2
Projected Views Multiview Drawing

A projected view is a view projected from a Base view. The scale of a projected view cannot be
set since the Base view that you projected it from controls its scale. The Base view also controls
the orientation and location of the projected views.
Drawing Sheets
A drawing sheet represents a blank piece of paper complete with titleblock and border. The size of
drawing sheet can be set by the user. The sheet size can be a custom size set by you or one of the
ANSI or ISO drawing sheet standards listed in the table shown in Figure 24-3.
There is no maximum number of drawing sheets that can be created for each drawing file but there
must be at least one sheet. Sheets can be created or deleted but Inventor will NOT allow all of them
to be deleted since one sheet must exist at all times.
The drawing sheet can be assigned a drawing border and a titleblock which can be created or
edited by you. Custom drawing template files containing borders and titleblocks are supplied with
the Inventor eBook.

There is no maximum number of drawing sheets that can be created for each
drawing file but there must be at least one sheet. One sheet must exist in each
drawing file at all times.

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 24-3

ANSI and ISO Standard Drawing Sheet Sizes

ANSI - English ISO - Metric

Size A 81/2 X 11 in Size A4 210 X 297 mm
Size B 11 X 17 in Size A3 297 X 410 mm
Size C 17 X 22 in Size A2 410 X 594 mm
Size D 22 X 34 in Size A1 594 X 820 mm
Size E 34 X 44 in Size A0 820 X 1198 mm

Figure 24-3
Standard ANSI and ISO Drawing Sheet Sizes

View Style
A view style can be displayed in one of three different styles. The three styles are hidden line,
hidden line removed, and shaded as shown in Figure 24-4. The style of a view can be changed
as required after the view has been placed.
View Scale
The scale of the view is a factor of the number that it is set to. For example, if the scale is set to 1
then the factor of 1 X 1 = 1, full scale or 1:1. If the scale is set to 2 then 2 X 1 = 2 or a scale of 2:1
which is twice the size of the original model. On the other hand, if the scale factor is set to 0.5 then
0.5 X 1 = 0.5 or the scale of 1:2 which would display the view one-half the size of the original model.

Hidden Line Hidden Line Removed Shaded

Figure 24-4
View Styles

A drawing file contains one or more 2 dimensional drawing sheets on which a 2D

and/or 3D scaled views of solid models contained in part, assembly, and
presentation files. A drawing file has the file extension .idw. IDW is an acronym for
Inventor DraWing.

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

 24-4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Inventor Command: BASE VIEW

The BASE VIEW command is used to create a Base view of the solid model contained in a part,
assembly, or presentation file on the drawing sheet. The scale, style, labeling, and orientation of
the view can be set when the view is created.

Shortcut: none

Inventor Command: PROJECTED VIEW

The PROJECTED VIEW command is used to create a projected view from a Base view. The style,
labeling, and direction from the Base view can be set by you when the view is created.
Shortcut: none

Inventor Command: SECTION VIEW

The SECTION VIEW command is used to create a Section view from an existing view. The
location, style, labeling, and direction from the selected view can be set by you when the view is
created.
Shortcut: none

ANSI is an acronym for American National Standard Institute. ANSI has set
drawing standards that are widely adapted and followed by most companies
working in English or Imperial measurements.
To read more about ANSI see: http://www.ansi.org/
ISO is an acronym for International Organization for Standardization. ISO has set the drawing
standards that are widely adapted and followed by most companies working in Metric
measurements.
To read more about ISO see: http://www.iso.org/iso/en/ISOOnline.frontpage

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 24-5

Creating 2D Drawings
Step 1 Check the default project and if necessary, set it to: Inventor Course.

Step 2 Enter the NEW command to start a new drawing file. Enable the English tab
and select the template: Modules Drawing ANSI (in).idw. (Figure Step 2)
Author's Comments: See the User Tip on page 24-4 for a explanation of the
acronyms ANSI and ISO.

Figure
Step 2

Step 3 When the drawing file is opened, it will display an A size drawing complete with border
and titleblock. Save the file with the name: Inventor Workalong 24-1. (Figure Step 3)

Figure Step 3

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

24 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 4 Enter the BASE VIEW command to create the Base view. It will open the Drawing View
dialogue box. Set the Orientation (view) to Front and the Style to Hidden Line. Ensure that the
dialogue box matches the figure. (Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 4

Step 5 Click OK. In the Open dialogue box, select the part: Inventor Workalong 22-1D.ipt.
(Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 24-7

Step 6 Select the location for the Front view. Don't be too concerned where you locate it since it
can be moved later. Try to locate it close to where it is shown in the figure. (Figure Step 6A and 6B)

Figure Step 6A

Figure Step 6B

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

24 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 7 Enter the PROJECT VIEW command and select the

Base view as the view to project from. (Figure Step 7)

Step 8 Move the cursor up to locate the Top view. Click the Figure Step 7
mouse at the desired location. Right click the mouse. In the
Right-click menu, select Create. (Figure Step 8A and 8B)

Figure Step 8B
Figure Step 8A

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 24-9

Step 9 Using what you just learned, use the PROJECT VIEW command to create the Right Side
view. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Step 10 Your drawing should now contain the Top, Front and Right Side views of the part.
(Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

24 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 11 Enter the PROJECT VIEW command. Select the Base view (Front view) and project an
Isometric view from it. (Figure Step 11)

Figure Step 11

Step 12 Right click the Isometric view. In the Right-click menu, click Edit View.
(Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 12

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 24-11

Step 13 In the Edit View dialogue box enable the display View/Scale label (turn the light bulb
on). Set the Scale to 0.75:1, View Identifier to ISOMETRIC and the Style to Shaded. (Figure
Step 13A and 13B)

Figure Step 13A

Figure Step 13B

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

24 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 14 Right click the file name in the Browser bar. In the Right-click
menu, click New Sheet. An A size drawing sheet will display in the
Graphic window. The new sheet will be labeled Sheet:2 and will
display in the Browser bar. (Figure Step 14)
Step 15 Right-click Sheet:2. In the Right-click menu, click Edit
Sheet. In the Edit Sheet dialogue box, pull down the Size list and
select B to change Sheet 2 to a B size. Ensure that Landscape is
enable. (Figure 15A, 15B, and 15C)

Figure Step 14

Figure Step 15A

Figure Step 15B

Figure Step 15C

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 24-13

Step 16 Using what you just learned, create a Base view of Top view of part:
Inventor Workalong 22-1C.ipt that you created in Module 22. (Figure Step 16)

Figure Step 16

Step 17 Enter the SECTION VIEW command. Move the cursor to the center of the circle on the
Top view until it displays the green snap circle. You may have to move the cursor touching the
circle circumference and then move back to the center. Do NOT select the green snap circle, wait
until it displays. Move the cursor to the right and you will see a dashed line indicating an implied
line which is orthographic or horizontal, in this case. move outside the view. The yellow grid snap
circle will display. Select a location when the grid snap is displayed. (Figure Step 17A and 17B)

Figure Step 17B

Figure Step 17A

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

24 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 18 Move the cursor across to the other side of the view and when the geometry constraint
(horizontal) displays, select a location about the same distance from the view as you did for the
other side of the view. Right-click the mouse. In the Right-click menu, select Continue. (Figure
Step 18A and 18B)

Figure 18A

Figure Step 18B

Step 19 Move the cursor down and the section view will display. The Section View dialogue box will
open. Set the dialogue box as shown in the figure. (Figure Step 19A and 19B)

Figure Step 19A

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 24-15

Step 20 Using the BASE VIEW command,

create an Isometric view and set the scale to
1.25:1. (Figure Step 20) Figure Step 19B

Figure Step 20

Step 21 Save and close the drawing file.

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

24 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

The default labels and colors can be configured for

each drawing file. Originally, these setting came
from the template file that you used to start the
drawing file. Any changes that you make will only
affect the current drawing file. Enter the DOCUMENT SETTINGS
command. See figure right.

To change the default labels of the sheets, simply edit the value as shown in the figure below.
To change the background color of the Sheet, the Sheet Outline, Highlight or Selection, select the
one you want from the Color dialogue box. In this example, the color of the sheet was change to
white.

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 24-17

To move a view on the drawing sheet, move the cursor onto the view’s border.
When you are on the border, it will highlight as shown in Step 1.

If the view is a base view or a projected view that has a view dependent on it,
the Graphic cursor will display as shown on the left.

If the view is a Base view or a projected view that does NOT have view dependent on it, the
cursor will display as shown on the right.

To move a view, simply press and hold down the left mouse
button and drag it to desired location as shown in Step 2. Project
Move

Step 1 Step 2

The Key Principles in Module 24

1 A drawing file contains one or more 2 dimensional drawing sheets on which a 2D and/or 3D
scaled views of solid models contained in part, assembly, and presentation files. A drawing file
has the file extension .idw. IDW is an acronym for Inventor DraWing.
2 A Base view is the first view created by the user. It controls the scale, orientation, and location of
the orthographic views projected from it.
3 A projected view is a view projected from a Base view. The scale of a projected view cannot
be set since the Base view that you projected it from controls its scale. The Base view also
controls the orientation and location of the projected views.
4 A drawing sheet represents a blank piece of paper complete with titleblock and border. The
size of drawing sheet can be set by the user. The sheet size can be a custom size set by the
user or one of the ANSI or ISO drawing sheet standards.
5 There is no maximum number of drawing sheets that can be created for each drawing file but
there must be at least one sheet. One sheet must exist in each drawing file at all times.
6 A view style can be displayed in one of three different styles. The three styles are hidden line,
hidden line removed, and shaded. The style of a view can be changed as required after the view
has been placed.
7 The scale of the view is a factor of the number that it is set to.

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

 24-18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 24-1 Time Allowed: 2 Hours

Part Name: See Below Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: See Below Color: N/A Material: N/A

Step 1 Create the following drawings and ensure the following:

A There is a separate file for each drawing sheet.
B Create the same views as shown.
C If the scale is not indicated, set it to full scale or 1:1.
D Each drawing file has only one drawing sheet.
E Save the drawing files with the Drawing Name shown for each part.
Part: Base
Drawing Size: B
Drawing Name: Inventor Lab 24-1A.idw Part
Name: Inventor Workalong 22-1A.ipt Template:
English-Modules Drawing ANSI (in).idw (Figure
Step 1A)

Figure Step 1A

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 24-19

Part: Post
Drawing Size: C
Drawing Name: Inventor Lab 24-1B.idw
Part Name: Inventor Workalong 22-1B.ipt
Template: English-Modules Drawing ANSI (in).idw
(Figure Step 1B)

Figure Step 1B

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

24 - 20 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Part: Screw
Drawing Size: A
Drawing Name: Inventor Lab 24-1C.idw
Part Name: Inventor Workalong 22-1E.ipt
Template: English-Modules Drawing ANSI (in).idw
(Figure Step 1C)

Figure Step 1C

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 24-21

Assembly: Tool Holder

Drawing Size: A
Drawing Name: Inventor Lab 24-1.idw
Part Name: Inventor Workalong 22-1.iam
Template: English-Modules Drawing ANSI (in).idw
(Figure Step 1D)

Figure Step 1D

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

24 - 22 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

2D Drawings - Part 1 ©2004 - 2020 Module 24

 Inventor ® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 25
2D Drawings - Part 2

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Describe basic dimensioning, centerlines, and standard styles.
2 Describe and apply the STYLES EDITOR command to copy and edit standard styles to create
your own dimension and text styles.
3 Describe and apply the RETRIEVE DIMENSION, CENTERLINES, and GENERAL
DIMENSION commands to place model and drawing dimensions and centerlines on drawing
views.
4 Describe how styles are exported out of and imported into drawing files.

Drafting Lesson
Basic Dimensioning Terms
Figure 25-1 shows the basic dimensioning terms that you will need to know when setting the
standards for dimensioning style.

Figure 25-1
Basic Dimensioning Terminology

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

25 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Dimensioning
Dimensioning is the process of adding size descriptions to the orthographic views of the model that
are placed on a drawing. Once a orthographic views of the model are dimensioned, the drawing
sheet can then be plotted and used for construction or reference. Up to this point in the modules
only shape and size descriptions have been added to the solid models that are been constructed
by adding geometrical and dimensional constraints. Since Inventor knows the exact size of the
solid models, the drafter/designer only has to control which dimensions are shown and where to
position them.
Dimensioning is a complex subject, not difficult, but there is a lot to learn. Therefore, in the Inventor
Modules, learning to control the appearance and location of the basic dimension types is taught.
As the Inventor user gets more experience dimensioning he/she can experiment with some of the
advanced dimensioning features.
Dimensioning Styles
A dimensioning style is a named set of variables or settings that controls the way the dimensions
will appear on the drawing. There are many different settings in a dimensioning style so it will take
the user some time to get used to setting them. Be patient and practice editing styles and inserting
dimensions as often as possible.
Inventor comes with several preset dimensioning styles which are part of the template that was
used when the drawing file was created. They can be edited but cannot be renamed. It is better to
create a new style by copying an renaming one of the Inventor standards and make the necessary
changes to it. After the editing is complete, name the style with an appropriate name and save it
so that it can be identified and used again at a later date. Dimensioning styles can also be
exported and imported from one drawing to another.
Text Styles
A text style is a named set of variables or settings that controls the way text will appear on a
drawing. Inventor comes with several preset text styles which were part of the template that was
used when the drawing file was created. Although they can be edited, they cannot be renamed. If
changes are required, it is better to create a new text style by copying one of the Inventor
standards and make the necessary changes to it. After the editing is complete name the style with
an appropriate name and save it so that it can identified and used at a later date. Text styles can
also be exported and imported from one drawing to another.
Centerlines
A centerline is used in technical drawings to indicate the location of the axis of symmetry. Placing
centerlines on all objects that have a symmetrical shape will help others who are reading the
drawing. The proper use of centerlines also cut down on the number of dimensions that are
required on a drawing to fully describe the object.
Placing Dimensions
The two types dimensions that can placed on a drawing are model dimensions and drawing
dimensions.

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 25-3

Model Dimensions
Model dimensions are the driven and driving dimensions that were placed in the 2D sketch when
the model was being constructed. The RETRIEVE DIMENSION command is used to retrieve the
dimensions from the model and display them on the drawing. If the driven dimensions in the
original sketches are changed in the future, the model dimensions in the drawing will automatically
change since they are showing the actual size of the model.
Drawing Dimensions
Drawing dimensions are dimensions that are placed in the drawing using the GENERAL
DIMENSION command. Dimensions are placed exactly where they are located in the 2D sketch
when the model was created. Inventor will obtain the actual sizes and if the model is changed in
the future, the drawing dimensions will automatically change to reflect the new size of the model.

Inventor Command: STYLES EDITOR

The STYLES EDITOR command is used to create and/or edit the styles and standards used by a
drawing file.
Shortcut: none

Inventor Command: RETRIEVE DIMENSIONS

The RETRIEVE DIMENSIONS command is used to retrieve model dimensions from the sketches
used to create the solid model. Only dimensions that are parallel to the plane of the view will
display. The user can select the dimensions that they want to display on the drawing.
Shortcut: none

Inventor Command: TEXT

The TEXT command is used to place text on the a
drawing sheet. It uses the default text style when the
text is inserted.
Shortcut: none

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

25 - 4 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Drafting Lesson
Center Lines
In multiview drawings, the center line is used to indicate the location of the axis of symmetry.
Placing center lines on all objects that have a symmetrical shape will help the reader and save
the you from inserting a lot of dimensions as you will see in future modules. Below are some
examples of typical applications of the use of center lines in a multiview drawing.
A ' C ' with an ' L ' through it is the symbol
for a center line. Center lines are drawn
as repeating long and short lines. See Figure 37-2.
Figure 37-3 shows a center line indicating the center
Figure 37-2
of the circle with two short lines called a center mark
intersecting at the center. Note in the right side
view, the center line follows the length of the cylinder.
When the symmetry ends, so does the center line. Note how the center line ends on the left side of
the arc. See Figure 37-4

Figure Step 37-3 Figure Step 37-4

Figure 37-5 shows the center lines along with the hidden lines that indicate a hole going through
the object. The center line on the top and bottom circles stops at the circle

Figure Step 37-5

In Figure 37-6, note how center lines are drawn for an

array of circles. Figure Step 37-6

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 25-5

Drafting Lesson
Centerlines - continued

There are four icons used to place centerlines on the drawing. In this module, you will be using
three of them. The Center Mark, Centerline, and Centered Pattern icons are shown in Diagrams
F1, G1 and H1. Diagrams F2, G2 and H2 show what centerline the applicable icon will place.

DIAGRAM F1
DIAGRAM F2

DIAGRAM G2

DIAGRAM G1

DIAGRAM H1
DIAGRAM H2

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

25 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Creating Dimensioning and Text Styles

Step 1 Check the default project and if necessary, set it to: Inventor Course.

Step 2 Open the drawing file: Inventor Lab 24-1A.idw. (Figure Step 2)

Figure Step 2

Step 3 Enter the STYLES EDITOR command to open the Styles and Standard Editor dialogue box.
Expand the children under the heading Dimension from the list of styles and standards on the left
side of the dialogue box. The seven dimensioning styles listed are the styles that are already
contained in your drawing. They were in the template file that you used when you created the
drawing. (Figure Step 3)

Figure Step 3

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 25-7

Step 4 Right-click the dimensioning style: Default (ANSI). In the New Style Name dialogue box,
enter the name: Modules in ANSI. Ensure that you enable the Add to Standard and then click
OK. (Figure Step 4A and 4B)

Figure Step 4B

Figure Step 4A

Author's Comments: You are copying the Default ANSI (in) dimensioning style to create your
own style. It is always best to copy from an existing style. That way, you get the existing
standards and you only have to change the items that you require to suit your new style.

Step 5 Click the dimensioning style: Modules in (ANSI) in the

style list on the left side of the dialogue box to make it the
current style. Note that on the right side of the dialogue box
your newly created style is listed at the top above the tabs.
This indicates it can be edited in the dialogue box. Enable
the Units tab. (Figure Step 5A and 5B).

Figure Step 5A

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

25 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Figure Step 5B

Step 6 Change the Linear and Angular box to match the settings shown in the figure.
(Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 25-9

Step 7 Enable the Display tab and if necessary, make any changes until it matches the figure.
(Figure Step 7)

Figure Step 7
Step 8 Enable the Options tab and if necessary, make any changes until it matches the figure.
(Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

25 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 9 Enable the Notes and Leaders tab and if necessary, make any changes until it matches the
figure. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

Step 10 Click the Save button to save the changes you made to the dimensioning style:
Modules in ANSI. Click Done to close the dialogue box. (Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

The default dimension styles cannot be renamed nor should they be altered. It is
always best to create your own style using a default style to copy from. After you
edit it to make the changes to suit the required style, name and save the style.
Pick an appropriate name so that you can easily find and use it in the future.

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 25-11

Step 11 Expand the children under the heading Text from the list of styles and standards on the left
side of the dialogue box. The style names listed are the text styles that are already contained in your
drawing. (Figure Step 11)

Step 12 Right click the style: Note Text (ANSI). In the right-
click menu, select New Style. (Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 11

Figure Step 12

Step 13 This will open the New Style Name dialogue box as shown in the figure. Note that since
the text style: Note Text (ANSI) was the current style, you will be starting with a copy of its
settings. Enter the name: Modules Note Text (ANSI) and click OK. Ensure that Add to standard is
enabled. (Figure Step 13)

Figure Step 13

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

25 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 14 Make any changes necessary to match the figure. (Figure Step 14)

Figure Step 14

Step 15 Click the Save button to save the changes you made to the text style.
Step 16 Use what you learned earlier in the workalong, make the dimensioning style:
Modules in ANSI the active style. (Figure Step 16)

Figure Step 16

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 25-13

Step 17 Enable the Text tab. Pull down the Primary Text Style pull-down box and select the text style:
Modules Note Text (ANS)I. This will make it the default text style for the dimensioning style: Modules
in ANSI. (Figure Step 17)

Figure Step 17

Step 18 The Text tab in the active dimension style: Modules in ANSI should appear as shown in the
figure.
Step 19 Click the Done button and if you are asked to Save Edits, click Yes. (Figure Step 19)

Figure Step 19

Step 20 Save and close the drawing file.

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

25 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Adding Annotation to the Drawing

Step 1 Check the default project and if necessary, set it to: Inventor Course.
Step 2 Open the drawing file: Inventor Lab 24-1A.idw.

Step 3 Click the Centerline icon to place the vertical centerline on the Top view. For the first point,
snap to the midpoint of the line on the top of the view. For the second point, snap to the midpoint of
the bottom line of the Top view. Move the cursor a short distance below the Top view and click it to
indicate the distance the centerline is to go past the view. (Figure Step 3A, 3B, 3C, and 3D)

Figure Step 3A

Figure Step 3B

Figure Step 3C

Figure Step 3D

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 25-15

Step 4 Using what you just learned, place the

centerline on the Front view. (Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 4

Author's Comments: Note that because the centerline in the Front view is so short, the break
lines do not appear.
Step 5 Open the Style and Standard Editor dialogue box. On the left side, expand the children in
the Center Mark heading. Select Center Mark (ANSI) to make it the current style. (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

Step 6 Right-click the standard style: Center Mark (ANSI) and click New Style. In the New Style
Name dialogue box, enter the name: Modules Center Line Short (ANSI). (Figure Step 6)

Figure Step 6

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

25 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 7 Select the new style that you just

created to make it the current style. Make
the changes shown in the figure. (Figure
Step 7)

Figure Step 7
Step 8 Select the centerline in the Front
view. It will highlight. (Figure Step 8)

Step 9 With the centerline selected, look on the

Inventor Standard pull-down menu. Note how it
shows Standard as the centerline type for
selected object. Select the centerline style:
Modules Center Line Short ANSI. (Figure Step 9A
and 9B)
Figure Step 8

Figure Step 9A

Figure Step 9B

When creating and dimensioning the 2D sketches in future models, keep in mind
how the RETRIEVE DIMENSION command works. It retrieves both driven and
driving dimensions that are parallel to the plane of each vew. After placing the
driven dimension to constrain the sketch, add the necessary driving
dimensions so that when you create the drawing and dimension the model, it will retrieve all of the
dimensions required. That way, you will may not have to place any general dimensions.

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 25-17

Step 10 Enter the RETRIEVE DIMENSION command and in the Retrieve Dimensions dialogue
box, ensure that Select View icon is enabled. Select the Top view. (Figure Step 10)

Figure Step 10

Step 11 In the Select Source box, enable Select Parts. Select all objects. The dimensions that you
inserted in the sketches that are parallel to the plane will display. (Figure Step 11)

Figure Step 11

Step 12 Ensure that the Select Dimension icon is enabled select the dimension(s) that are
selected in the figure. (Figure Step 12)

Figure Step 12

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

25 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Author's Comments: The dimensions that display on the view may be different then the ones
shown here. It depends how you constructed the model for this part. Select the dimensions to
the best of your ability. If you cannot display all the dimensions shown, you can add them as
drawing dimensions later in the workalong.
Step 13 Using what you just learned, select
the dimensions for the Front view of the
model. In this case, there was only one.
(Figure Step 13)

Author's Comments: The dimensions that

display on your model may be different then
the one shown here. It depends how you
constructed the model for this part. Select
the dimension to best of your ability.

Figure Step 13

To relocated a dimension on a drawing, move the

cursor onto the dimension. When the cursor is on
a dimension, it will highlight and the Move icon will
display as shown in the figure to the right.
The Move cursor is shown in the figure on the left.
When the Move cursor displays, press and hold down
on the left mouse button and drag the cursor to
approximately the location you want to place the
dimension. As you do that, Inventor will display a
temporary centerline indicating the center location between the
extension lines as shown in the figure to the right. It will help you
center the dimension text. When you have the dimension positioned,
release the mouse button.

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 25-19

Step 14 Move the dimensions to match

the figure as close as possible. (Figure
Step 14)

Author's Comments: Use the move

technique shown in the User Tip on Page
25-18. Note: If you are missing some of
the dimensions that are shown in the
figure, don’t be concerned. You can add
them as drawing dimensions later in the
module.

Step 15 Select all of the dimensions.

Change the dimensioning style to:
Modules in ANSI. To do this, while the
dimensions are selected, pull down the
standards list. From the dimension style
list, find and select the style:
Modules in ANSI in the pull-down list on
the Inventor Standard menu. (Figure Step Figure Step 14
15A , 15B, and 15C)

Figure Step 15B

Figure Step 15A

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

25 - 20 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 16 Set the default dimensioning style

before you insert the drawing dimensions.
Pull-down the style standards list and select:
Modules in (ANSI). It should now display as
shown in the figure. When you insert your Figure Step 15C
dimensions they will use the default
dimensioning style. (Figure Step 16)

Figure Step 16

Step 17 Add the remainder of the

dimensions to match the figure. This is
done using the GENERAL DIMENSION (D)
command, just like you did when creating
your 2D sketches.
(Figure Step 17A and17B)

Figure Step 17A

Figure Step 17B

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 25-21

Step 18 To add or edit dimension text, click the text

and right-click the mouse. In the Right-click menu,
select Text. This will open the Format Text
dialogue box. (Figure Step 18)

Step 19 In the text box at the bottom of the

dialogue box you will see the symbols <<>>. This
symbol indicates the actual model dimension. You
cannot edit the dimension since Inventor gets the
dimension from the model. To add text, click the
cursor behind the symbol and enter a comma.
Press the Enter key to go to a new line. Add the
text 4 PLACES. (Figure Step 19) Figure Step 18

Figure Step 19

The dimension text symbol “<<>>” signifies that the actual dimension number is a
model or drawing dimension size. Inventor will obtain the actual dimension from
the solid model and display it on the drawing. You cannot edit this number nor can
you delete it. If the size of the model is modified, the dimension Inventor
displays will change to reflect the true size of the model.

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

25 - 22 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 20 Using what you just learned, add the text to the
other radius dimension. (Figure Step 20)

Step 21 To fill-in the titleblock, simply change the drawing's

properties. To do that, right-click the drawing's icon in the
Browser bar. In the Right-click menu, click iProperties. The
titleblock has been programmed to extract the properties of
the current drawing file. It will open the Inventor Properties
dialogue box. (Figure Step 21)

Figure Step 20

Figure Step 21

Step 22 Enable the Summary tab. Enter

TOOL HOLDER - BASE in the Title box and
your name in the Author box. (Figure Step
22)

Figure Step 22

Step 23 Enable the Project tab. Enter

WORKALONG 25-1A in the Part
Number box. Your titleblock should now
appear as shown in figure. (Figure Step
23A and 23B)

Figure Step 23A

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 25-23

Figure Step 23B

Step 24 Enter the TEXT command and select the location to place the text on the drawing. The
cursor will display as a plus sign. Move it to just above the titleblock as shown in the figure. (Figure
Step 24)

Figure Step 24

Step 25 When you select the location for the text, the Format Text dialogue box will open. In the
text box along the bottom of the dialogue box enter the text as shown in the figure. Ensure that
the default text style is set to: Modules Note Text (ANSI) as shown in the dialogue box. (Figure
Step 25)
`

Figure Step 25

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

25 - 24 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 26 The completed drawing should appear similar to the figure. (Figure Step 26)

Figure Step 26

Step 27 Save and close the drawing.

Exporting and Importing Styles

When a style is created in a drawing file it is only useable in that drawing file. To save you re-
creating the style in each new drawing file, the style can be saved as a file on the hard drive and
then retrieve into another drawing. Saving the style file from a drawing is called exporting and
retrieving it into a drawing is called importing.

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 25-25

Exporting and Importing Styles

Step 1 Using Windows Explorer, create the folder: Style Library in the existing
folder: C:\CAD Courses\Inventor Course. (Figure Step 1)
Step 2 Start Inventor and check the default project. If necessary, set it to:
Inventor Course.

Figure Step 1

Step 3 Open the drawing: Inventor Lab 24-1A.idw

Step 4 Open the Style and Standard Editor dialogue

box. Find and select the style: Modules in (ANSI)
under the Dimension heading. It is the dimensioning
style that you created earlier in the module. Right-
click the name. In the Right-click menu, select
Export. (Figure Step 4)

Figure Step 4
Step 5 Select the Style Library folder you created in Step 1. In the File name: box, enter the file
name: Modules in (ANSI). (Figure Step 5)

Figure Step 5

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

25 - 26 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 6 Open a new drawing file. Enter the STYLE

EDITOR command and in the dialogue box, click the
Import box located along the bottom of the box.
(Figure Step 6)

Step 7 This will open the Import style definition

dialogue box. Click the folder Style Library and select
the file: Modules in (ANSI) .styxml that you exported in
Step 5. (Figure Step 7) Figure Step 6

Figure Step 7

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 25-27

Step 8 Activate the file: Inventor Lab 24-1A.idw and export the other two styles that you created in
this drawing. Figure Step 8 shows the three styles that should now be in the Style Library folder.
You can check it using Windows Explorer. (Figure Step 8)

Figure Step 8

Step 9 Open a new drawing file. Enter the STYLE EDITOR command and in the dialogue box click
the Import box located along the bottom of the box. This will open the Import style definition
dialogue box. This will open the Import style definition dialogue box. With the Look in: box
displaying the folder Style Library, select the file: Modules in (ANSI) .styxml that you exported in
Step 5. (Figure Step 9)

Figure Step 9

The Key Principles in Module 25

1 The default styles cannot be renamed nor should they be altered. It is always best to create
your own named style using a default style to copy from.
2 A style is a named set of variables or settings that controls the way the annotation will appear
on the drawing.
3 The RETRIEVE DIMENSION command is used to retrieve the driven and driving dimensions
from the model and display them on the drawing. If the driven dimensions in the original sketches
are changed, the model dimensions in the drawing will automatically change.

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 25-28 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 25-1 Time Allowed: 60 Min.

Part Name: See Below Project: Inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: See Below Color: N/A Material: N/A

Step 1 Create the drawing shown below. Ensure that you:

A Retrieve as many model dimensions as you can.
B Add the drawing dimensions to complete the drawing as shown below.
C Import the dimension style: Modules in (ANSI) and use it as the dimensioning style in your
drawing. Match the drawing shown below.
D Save the drawing files with the drawing name shown below.
Part: Post
Drawing Size: D
Drawing Name: Inventor Lab 25-1.idw
Part Name: Inventor Workalong 22-1B.ipt
Template: English-Modules Drawing ANSI
(in).idw
(Figure Step 1A, 1B, and 1C)

Figure Step 1A

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 25-29

Figure Step 1B

Figure Step 1C

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

25 - 30 Inventor Self-paced eCourse - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

2D Drawings - Part 2 ©2004 - 2020 Module 25

 Inventor ® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module 26
Competency Test No. 5

Learning Outcomes
When you have completed this module, you will be able to:
1 Within a six hour time limit, complete a written exam and the lab exercise.

Competency Tests
The Inventor eBook was written with competency based modules. What that means is that you
have not completed each module until you have mastered it. The Competency Test module
contains multiple choice questions and a comprehensive lab exercise to test your mastery of the set
of modules that you completed. There are no answers or keys supplied in a Competency Test
module since it is meant to be checked by your instructor. If there are any parts of this module that
you have trouble completing, you should go back and reread the module or modules containing the
information that you are having trouble with. If necessary, redo as many lab exercises required until
you fully understand the material.
If you are Completing this eBook Without the Aid of an Instructor
Complete the written test and the lab exercise.
If you are Completing this eBook in a Classroom with an Instructor
The instructor will give instructions on what to do after you have completed this module.

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

26 - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Inventor
Competency Test No. 5
Open Book
Multiple Choice Questions
Select the BEST answer.
1 What file extension does a presentation file have?
A) .ipt
B) .idw
C) .iam
D) .iaf
E) .ipn

2 What is the term used in an assembly file that refers to the part files linked to the assembly?
A) link
B) location
C) indicator
D) source
E) reference

3 What does the symbol “<<>>” signify in a dimension text?

A) A reference dimension.
B) The actual dimension number is a model or drawing dimension size.
C) The text size.
D) The dimension units of the model or drawing dimension.
E) That there is no dimension.

4 What is the name of first view you create on a drawing that controls the scale, orientation and
location of the orthographical views projected from it?
A) Section View
B) Multiview
C) Projected View
D) Base view
E) Orthographic view

5 What command is used to get the model dimensions for a view?

A) GET DIMENSION
B) GENERAL DIMENSION
C) RETRIEVE DIMENSION
D) RECOVER DIMENSION
E) OBTAIN DIMENSION

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 26-3

6 What is the minimum and maximum number of drawing sheets that can exist in a single
drawing file?
A) Minimum - 1 Maximum - none
B) Minimum - 1 Maximum - 10
C) Minimum - 0 Maximum - none
D) Minimum - 1 Maximum - 100
E) Minimum - 0 Maximum - 10

7 What file extension does a drawing file have?

A) .ipt
B) .idw
C) .iam
D) .iaf
E) .ipn

8 What is the method of the construction called when an assembly file is created from a series
of part files that were previously created and saved in their own .IPT file?
A) Part Assembly
B) Bottom-up Assembly
C) IPT Assembly
D) Top-down Assembly
E) Series Assembly

9 What is the term used to describe the distances that the parts are moved from the grounded
part in an explode assembly file?
A) Distance
B) Exploded
C) Trails
D) Animation
E) Tweak

10 What file extension does an assembly file have?

A) .ipt
B) .idw
C) .iam
D) .iaf
E) .ipn

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

 26-4 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Lab Exercise 26-1 Time Allowed: 6 Hours

Name: Inventor Lab 26-1 Project: inventor Course Units: Inches
Template: See Below Color: See Below Material: See Below

Step 1 Create the following parts. Each part must have its own file and constructed as follows:
A Project the Center Point onto the Base plane.
B Select your own location for X0Y0Z0.
C Draw the necessary sketches and extrude or revolve them to produce the solid models. Apply
all of the necessary geometrical and dimensional constraints to maintain the objects shape and
size. All sketches must be fully constrained.
D Apply the color and material shown.
E Ensure that you draw each part in the correct orientation so that they can be easily assembled
together. The Home view for each part will help you.
(Figure Step 1A, 1B, and 1C)
Part: Base
Part Name: Inventor Lab 26-1A
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt
Color: Steel - Polished
Material: Stainless Steel

Figure Step 1A
Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 1B
Solid Model - Orbited View

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 26-5

Figure Step 1C
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

26 - 6 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Part: Adjustment Shaft

Part Name: Inventor Lab 26-1B
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt
Color: Brass - Satin
Material: Soft Yellow Brass
(Figure Step 1D, 1E, and 1F)

Figure Step 1D
Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 1E
Solid Model -
Orbited View
Figure Step 1F
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 26-7

Part: Adjusting Nut

Part Name: Inventor Lab 26-1C
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt
Color: Nickel
Material: Non-Alloy Steel
(Figure Step 1G and 1H)
Note: Knurl the outside of the nut.

Figure Step 1G
Solid Model - Home View

Figure Step 1H
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

26 - 8 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Part: V-Shaft
Part Name: Inventor Lab 26-1D
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt
Color: Chrome - Polished Blue
Material: Stainless Steel
(Figure Step 1J and 1K)

Figure Step 1J
Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 1K
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 26-9

Part: Set Screw

Part Name: Inventor Lab 26-1E
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt
Color: Steel - Polished
Material: Steel
(Figure Step 1L, 1M, and 1N)

Figure Step 1L
Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 1M
Solid Model -
Orbited View

Figure Step 1N
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

26 - 10 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Part: Bolt
Part Name: Inventor Lab 26-1F
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt
Color: Metal-AL-6061 - Machined
Material: Steel
(Figure Step 1P and 1Q)

Figure Step 1P
Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 1Q
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 26-11

Part: Washer
Part Name: Inventor Lab 26-1G
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt
Color: Metal-AL-6061 - Machined
Material: Steel
(Figure Step 1R and 1S)

Figure Step 1R
Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 1S
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

26 - 12 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Part: Nut
Part Name: Inventor Lab 26-1H
Template: English-Modules Part (in).ipt
Color: Metal-AL-6061 - Machined
Material: Steel
(Figure Step 1T and 1U)

Figure Step 1T
Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 1U
Dimensioned Multiview Drawing

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 26-13

Step 2 Assemble the parts that you created in Step 1 to create the Machine Jack assembly as
shown in figures below. There are two washers, one above and one below the base. The washer
under the base should be assembled with 0.5 inches offset from the bottom of the base. Save the
assembly using the following name:
Assembly: Machine Jack
Assembly Name: Inventor Lab 26-2A
Template: English-Modules Assembly (in).iam
(Figure Step 2A and 2B)

Figure Step 2A
Assembled Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 2B
Assembled Solid Model -
Orbited View

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

26 - 14 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Step 3 With the assembly file: Inventor Lab 26-2A.iam as the active file, save a copy of it naming
it: Inventor Lab 26-2B.iam.

Step 4 Open the assembly file: Inventor Lab 26-2B.iam that you just copied. Change the color of
the Base and the Adjusting Nut in the assembly file to Clear - Blue as shown in the figures below.

Assembly: Machine Jack

Assembly Name: Inventor Lab 26-2B
Template: N/A
(Figure Step 4A and 4B)

Figure Step 4A
Assembled Solid Model -
Home View

Figure Step 4B
Assembled Solid Model -
Orbited View

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 26-15

Step 5 Create a presentation file using the assembly file Inventor Lab 26-2A. Tweak it to match as
close as you can to Figure Step 5.
Step 6 Set the animation Interval to 20 and the Repetitions to
2. Test the animation.
Presentation: Machine Jack
Presentation Name: Inventor Lab 26-2A
Template: N/A

Step 7 Create the following drawing as follows:

A Create one drawing file complete with two sheets as
shown on page 26-15 and 26-16.
B Create the same views shown in the drawings.
C If the scale is not indicated, set it to full scale or 1:1.
D Save the drawing file with the drawing name:
Inventor Lab 26-1.idw Figure Step 5
E Complete the titleblock in both drawings sheets.
Drawing Name: Inventor Lab 26-1.idw
Template: English-Modules Drawing ANSI (in).idw

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

26 - 16 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Sheet: 1
Part: Base
Drawing Size: C
Part Name: Inventor Lab 26-
1A.ipt
(Figure Step 7A and 7B)

Figure Step 7A

Figure Step 7B

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15 26-17

Sheet: 2
Part: Post
Drawing Size: A
Part Name: Inventor Lab 26-1D.ipt
(Figure Step 7C and 7D)

Figure Step 7C

Figure Step 7D

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

26 - 18 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

Notes

Competency Test No. 5 ©2004 - 2020 Module 26

 Inventor ® Self-paced eCourse

Autodesk Inventor
Module Index
Index

MODULE MODULE
2D drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 EXTRUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2D sketching planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 extruding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2DSKETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
aligned dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
FILLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
angular dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
ANIMATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
GENERALDIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
geometrical constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
glass box principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
hidden lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
base sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
HOME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
BASEVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
inclined lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Cartesian Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . 4
isometric drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CENTERPOINTARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
ISOMETRIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
CENTER POINT CIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . . 12
linear dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CENTERLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
modifying solid models . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
configure Inventor software . . Introduction 2
mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
consumed sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
CREATEVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
multiview drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
crossing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
dimensional constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
NEWSHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
drawing sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Drafting Settings dialogue box . . . . . . . 18
drawing file extension names . . . . . . . . . 2 object lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
drawing extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
driven dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
driving dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ORBIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
orbiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
editing geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
EXTEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Index ©2004 - 2020 Module index

Index - 2 Inventor Self-paced eBook - Autodesk Inventor - Revised 2020-06-15

MODULE MODULE
PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ZOOM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ZOOMALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
physical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
PLACECOMPONENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
PLACECONSTRAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
POLYGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
PRECISE VIEW ROTATION . . . . . . . . 23
presentation files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
PROJECTGEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
PROJECTEDVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

RETRIEVE DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . 25
REVOLVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
revolving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
ROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SECTIONVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
sketching lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SLICEGRAPHICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
snapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
STYLEEDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

TANGENTCIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
template files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
THREAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
three standard views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
THREEPOINTARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
TWEAKCOMPONENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
TWO POINT RECTANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . 18

unconsumed sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

visualizing 3D models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
work features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
work point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
work planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
work axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
WORKPLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
WORKPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
WORKAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Index ©2004 - 2020 Module index